Home

ZyXEL ADSL2+ User's Manual

1. Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis 204 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 205 Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance This chapter tells you how to backup and restore your configuration file as well as upload new firmware and configuration files 25 1 Filename Conventions The configuration file often called the romfile or rom 0 contains the factory default settings in the menus such as password DHCP Setup TCP IP Setup etc It arrives from ZyXEL with a rom filename extension Once you have customized the Prestige s settings they can be saved back to your computer under a filename of your choosing ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System sometimes referred to as the ras file is the system firmware and has a bin filename extension With many FTP and TFTP clients the filenames are similar to those seen next Note Only use firmware for your Prestige s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your Prestige ftp gt put firmware bin ras This is a sample FTP session showing the transfer of the computer file firmware bin to the Prestige ftp get rom 0 config cfg This is a sample FTP session saving the current configuration to the computer file config cfg If your T FTP client does not allow you to have a destination filename different than the
2. The following table describes the Edit Bridge Static Route menu Table 48 Menu 12 3 1 Edit Bridge Static Route FIELD DESCRIPTION Route This is the route index number you typed in Menu 12 3 Bridge Static Route Setup Route Name Type a name for the bridge static route for identification purposes Active Indicates whether the static route is active Yes or not No Ether Address Type the MAC address of the destination computer that you want to bridge the packets to IP Address If available type the IP address of the destination computer that you want to bridge the packets to Gateway Node Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the number of the remote node one to eight that is the gateway of this static route When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 20 Bridging Setup 160 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 161 Chapter 20 Bridging Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 21 Network Address Translation NAT This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Prestige 21 1 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT SUA Single User Account is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping Many to One and Server See the NAT Setup section or a detai
3. ENT Press ER to Confirm or Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Bridge Options Ethernet Addr Timeout min 0 ESC to Cancel Table 47 Remote Node Network Layer Options Bridge Fields FIELD DESCRIPTION Bridge menu 11 1 Make sure this field is set to Yes 159 Chapter 20 Bridging Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 47 Remote Node Network Layer Options Bridge Fields continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Edit IP Bridge menu 11 1 Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER to display menu 11 3 Ethernet Addr Timeout Type the time in minutes for the Prestige to retain the Ethernet Address min menu 11 3 information in its internal tables while the line is down If this information is retained your Prestige will not have to recompile the tables when the line comes back up 20 2 2 Bridge Static Route Setup Similar to network layer static routes a bridging static route tells the Prestige the route to a node before a connection is established You configure bridge static routes in menu 12 3 1 go to menu 12 choose option 3 then choose a static route to edit as shown next Figure 93 Menu 12 3 1 Edit Bridge Static Route enu 12 3 1 Edit Bridge Static Route Route 1 Route Name Active No Ether Address IP Address Gateway Node 1 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel
4. Reset your ADSL line to reinitialize your link to the DSLAM For details refer to Chapter 12 Maintenance web configurator or Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis SMT 30 4 Problems with the LAN Interface Table 77 Troubleshooting the LAN Interface PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION Prestige from the LAN I cannot access the If the 10M 100M LEDs on the front panel are both off refer to the Problems with the LAN LED section Make sure that the IP address and the subnet mask of the Prestige and your computer s are on the same subnet cannot ping any If the 10M 100M LEDs on the front panel are both off refer to the Problems computer on the LAN with the LAN LED section Make sure that the IP address and the subnet mask of the Prestige and the computers are on the same subnet 30 5 Problems with the WAN Interface Table 78 Troubleshooting the WAN Interface PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION I cannot get a WAN IP address from the ISP The ISP provides the WAN IP address after authenticating you Authentication may be through the user name and password the MAC address or the host name The username and password apply to PPPoE and PPPoA encapsulation only Make sure that you have entered the correct Service Type User Name and Password be sure to use the correct casing Refer to Chapter 6 WAN Setup web configurator or Chapter 17 Internet Access SMT 243 Cha
5. Syslog IP Address Type the IP address of your syslog server Log Facility Use SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select one of seven different local options The log facility lets you log the message in different server files Refer to your UNIX manual 201 Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 63 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting PARAMETER DESCRIPTION Types CDR Call Detail Record CDR logs all data phone line activity if set to Yes Packet Triggered The first 48 bytes or octets and protocol type of the triggering packet is sent to the UNIX syslog server when this field is set to Yes Filter Log No filters are logged when this field is set to No Filters with the individual filter Log field set to Yes are logged when this field is set to Yes PPP Log PPP events are logged when this field is set to Yes When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel The following are examples of the four types of syslog messages sent by the Prestige Figure 140 Syslog Example 1 CDR SdemdSyslogSend SYSLOG CDR SYSLOG INFO String String board xx line xx channel xx call xx str board the hardware board ID line the WAN ID in a board Channel channe
6. Press ENTER to Exit 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Find the rom file on your computer that you want to restore to your Prestige 7 Use put to transfer files from the Prestige to the computer for example put config rom rom 0 transfers the configuration file config rom on your computer to the Prestige See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions 8 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt The Prestige will automatically restart after a successful restore process 25 3 2 Restore Using FTP Session Example Figure 145 Restore Using FTP Session Example ftp gt put config rom rom 0 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR rom 0 226 File received OK 221 Goodbye for writing flash ftp 16384 bytes sent in 0 06Seconds 273 07Kbytes sec ftp gt quit Refer to the TFTP and FTP over WAN Management Limitations section to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 212 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 25 4 Uploading Firmware and Configuration Files This section shows you how to upload firmware and configurati
7. gt LI Ld LJ Ld gt LJ Ld H gt LJ N WAN LAN B i SN ER Mn u EE Internet Te RER T Subnet 2 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 2 6 8 Configuring WAN Backup To change your Prestige s WAN backup settings click WAN then WAN Backup The screen appears as shown Chapter 6 WAN Setup 70 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 22 WAN Backup WAN WAN Backup Setup Backup Type DSL Link Check WAN IP Address1 0 0 0 0 Check WAN IP Address2 0 0 0 0 Check WAN IP Address3 0 0 0 Fail Tolerance Recovery Interval Timeout Traffic Redirect Active Metric Backup Gateway Back Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 13 WAN Backup LABEL DESCRIPTION Backup Type Select the method that the Prestige uses to check the DSL connection Select DSL Link to have the Prestige check if the connection to the DSLAM is up Select ICMP to have the Prestige periodically ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address fields Check WAN IP Configure this field to test your Prestige s WAN accessibility Type the IP address of Address1 3 a reliable nearby computer for example your ISP s DNS server address Note If you activate either traffic redirect or dial backup you must configure at least one IP address here When using a WAN backup connection the Prestige periodically pings the addres
8. IP ADDRESS OCTET 1 OCTET 2 OCTET 3 OCTET 4 Class A 0 Network number Host ID Host ID Host ID Class B 10 Network number Network number Host ID Host ID Class C 110 Network number Network number Network number Host ID gt gt Note Host IDs of all zeros or all ones are not allowed Therefore A class C network 8 host bits can have 28 2 or 254 hosts A class B address 16 host bits can have 2 2 or 65534 hosts A class A address 24 host bits can have 274 2 hosts approximately 16 million hosts Appendix C 260 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Since the first octet of a class A IP address must contain a 0 the first octet of a class A address can have a value of 0 to 127 Similarly the first octet of a class B must begin with 10 therefore the first octet of a class B address has a valid range of 128 to 191 The first octet of a class C address begins with 110 and therefore has a range of 192 to 223 Table 84 Allowed IP Address Range By Class CLASS ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET ALLOWED RANGE OF FIRST OCTET BINARY DECIMAL Class A 00000000 to 01111111 0 to 127 Class B 10000000 to 10111111 128 to 191 Class C 11000000 to 11011111 192 to 223 Class D 11100000 to 11101111 224 to 239 Subnet Masks A subnet mask is used to determine which bits are part of the network number and which bits are
9. Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control 1 Budget Management Enter Menu Selection Number 26 2 1 Budget Management Menu 24 9 1 shows the budget management statistics for outgoing calls Enter 1 from Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control to bring up the following menu Figure 152 Menu 24 9 1 System Maintenance Budget Management Menu 24 9 1 System Maintenance Budget Management Remote Node Connection Time Total Budget Elapsed Time Total Period 1 MyIsp No Budget No Budget Reset Node 0 to update screen 219 Chapter 26 System Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The total budget is the time limit on the accumulated time for outgoing calls to a remote node When this limit is reached the call will be dropped and further outgoing calls to that remote node will be blocked After each period the total budget is reset The default for the total budget is 0 minutes and the period is 0 hours meaning no budget control You can reset the accumulated connection time in this menu by entering the index of a remote node Enter 0 to update the screen The budget and the reset period can be configured in menu 11 1 for the remote node when PPPOE encapsulation is selected Table 68 Menu 24 9 1 System Maintenance Budget Management FIELD DESCRIPTION Remote Node Enter the index number of the remote node you want to reset just one in this case Connection Tim
10. 2 My Recent Documents e My Pictures EJ Command Prompt EJ Acrobat Reader 4 0 Tour Windows XP Windows Movie Maker Control Panel f Printers and Faxes 9 Help and Support Search All Programs gt 177 Run Pe Lag Off o Turn Off Computer untitled Paint 2 For Windows XP click Network Connections For Windows 2000 NT click Network and Dial up Connections Figure 175 Windows XP Control Panel Control Panel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q ee d PO Search Folders f Address Control Panel Vg Control Panel A e 0 Add Hardware Gp Switch to Category View See Also V y Fonts Game Windows Update Controllers 3 Right click Local Area Connection and then click Properties Appendix B 252 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 176 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties Network Connections File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q sxx z Q 2 s Search gt Folders EBK Address Network Connections LAN or High Speed Internet Network Tasks ocal Area Connection amp Create a new connection f Set up a home or small office network mera amp Disable this network a s device Repair DN Repair this connection 3 Create Shortcut View status of this mij Rename this connection connection Rename Change settings of this connection Properties 4 Se
11. 35 ATM QoS Type CBR Peak Cell Rat Sustain Cell Rat aximum Burst Size y Login N A y Password N A ENET ENCAP Gateway N A IP Address Assignment Static IP Address 0 0 0 0 etwork Address Translation SUA Only Address Mapping Set N A PCR 0 SCR 0 MBS 0 ESC to Cancel ER to Confirm or ENT Press The following table contains instructions on how to configure your Prestige for Internet access Table 42 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION ISP s Name Enter the name of your Internet Service Provider ISP This information is for identification purposes only Encapsulation Press SPACE BAR to select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP Choices are PPPoE PPPoA RFC 1483 or ENET ENCAP Multiplexing Press SPACE BAR to select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP Choices are VC based or LLC based VPI Enter the Virtual Path Identifier VPI assigned to you VCI Enter the Virtual Channel Identifier VCI assigned to you ATM QoS Type Press SPACE BAR and select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth Select UBR Unspecified Bit Rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select VBR Variable Bit Rate for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can sen
12. Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 23 Remote Management LABEL DESCRIPTION Server Type Each of these labels denotes a service that you may use to remotely manage the Prestige Access Status Select the access interface Choices are All LAN Only WAN Only and Disable Port This field shows the port number for the remote management service You may change the port number for a service in this field but you must use the same port number to use that service for remote management Secured Client The default 0 0 0 0 allows any client to use this service to remotely manage the IP Prestige Type an IP address to restrict access to a client with a matching IP address Apply Click Apply to save your settings back to the Prestige Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 10 Remote Management Configuration 92 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 93 Chapter 10 Remote Management Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP This chapter introduces the UPnP feature in the web configurator 11 1 Introducing Universal Plug and Play Universal Plug and Play UPnP is a distributed open networking standard that uses TCP IP for simple peer to peer network connectivity between devices A UPnP device can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address convey its capa
13. Apply Cancel Delete The following table describes the labels in this screen 83 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 20 Address Mapping Rule Edit LABEL DESCRIPTION Type Choose the port mapping type from one of the following One to One One to One mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for One to one NAT mapping type Many to One Many to One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation ZyXEL s Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only Many to Many Overload Many to Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Many to Many No Overload Many to Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses Server This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world Local Start IP This is the starting local IP address ILA Local IP addresses are N A for Server port mapping Local End IP This is the end local IP address ILA If your rule is for all local IP addresses then enter 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is N A for One to One and Server mapping
14. Figure 104 NAT Example 1 a LAN ES 192 168 1 10 CDC Inside Local Addresses ILA Internet Dynamic Inside Global Address Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 170 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 105 Menu 4 Internet Access amp NAT Example Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ISP s Name MyISP Encapsulation RFC 1483 ultiplexing LLC based VPI 8 VCI 35 ATM QoS Type UBR Peak Cell Rat PCR 0 Sustain Cell Rate SCR 0 Maximum Burst Size MBS 0 y Login N A y Password N A ENET ENCAP Gateway N A IP Address Assignment Static IP Address 0 0 0 0 Network Address Translation SUA Only Address Mapping Set N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel From menu 4 choose the SUA Only option from the Network Address Translation field This is the Many to One mapping discussed in the General NAT Examples section The SUA Only read only option from the Network Address Translation field in menus 4 and 11 3 is specifically pre configured to handle this case 21 5 2 Example 2 Internet Access with an Inside Server Figure 106 NAT Example 2 Inside Local i bei Addresses ILA gt N LAN EA 192 168 1 10 B EH gt Internet c Inside Server mi 192 168 1 10 Dynamic Inside Global Address In this case you do exactly as above use the convenient pre configured SUA Onl
15. N means there are no more rules to check You can specify an action to be taken for instance forward the packet drop the packet or check the next rule For the latter the next rule is independent of the rule just checked Action Matched F means to forward the packet immediately and skip checking the remaining rules D means to drop the packet N means to check the next rule Action Not Matched F means to forward the packet immediately and skip checking the remaining rules D means to drop the packet N means to check the next rule 181 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The protocol dependent filter rules abbreviation are listed as follows Table 54 Rule Abbreviations Used FILTER TYPE DESCRIPTION IP Pr Protocol SA Source Address SP Source Port Number DA Destination Address DP Destination Port Number GEN Off Offset Len Length 22 4 Configuring a Filter Rule To configure a filter rule type its number in Menu 21 x Filter Rules Summary and press ENTER to open menu 21 x 1 for the rule There are two types of filter rules TCP IP and Generic Depending on the type of rule the parameters for each type will be different Use SPACE BAR to select the type of rule that you want to create in the Filter Type field and press ENTER to open the respective menu To speed up filter
16. Multiplexing The Prestige supports VC based and LLC based multiplexing 33 Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Encapsulation The Prestige supports PPPoA RFC 2364 PPP over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 RFC 1483 encapsulation over ATM MAC encapsulated routing ENET encapsulation as well as PPP over Ethernet RFC 2516 Network Management Menu driven SMT System Management Terminal management Embedded web configurator CLI Command Line Interpreter Remote Management via Telnet or Web SNMP manageable DHCP Server Client Relay Built in Diagnostic Tools Syslog e Telnet Support Password protected telnet access to internal configuration manager TFTP FTP server firmware upgrade and configuration backup support supported Supports OAM F4 F5 loop back AIS and RDI OAM cells Other PPPoE Features e PPPoE idle time out PPPoE Dial on Demand Diagnostics Capabilities The Prestige can perform self diagnostic tests These tests check the integrity of the following circuitry FLASH memory ADSL circuitry RAM LAN port Packet Filters The Prestige s packet filtering functions allows added network security and management Ease of Installation Your Prestige is designed for quick intuitive and easy installation Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige 34 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Housing Your Prestige s compact and ve
17. o Io Poll Interval s 5 Set Interval Stop Chapter 12 Maintenance 110 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 26 System Status Show Statistics LABEL DESCRIPTION System up Time This is the elapsed time the system has been up CPU Load This field specifies the percentage of CPU utilization LAN or WAN Port Statistics This is the WAN or LAN port Link Status This is the status of your WAN link Upstream Speed This is the upstream speed of your Prestige Downstream Speed This is the downstream speed of your Prestige Node Link This field displays the remote node index number and link type Link types are PPPoA ENET RFC 1483 and PPPoE Interface This field displays the type of port Status For the WAN port this displays the port speed and duplex setting if you re using Ethernet encapsulation and Down line is down Idle line ppp idle Dial starting to trigger a call and Drop dropping a call if you re using PPPoE encapsulation For a LAN port this shows the port speed and duplex setting TxPkts This field displays the number of packets transmitted on this port RxPkts This field displays the number of packets received on this port Errors This field displays the number of error packets on this port Tx B s This field displays the number of bytes transmitted i
18. 187 11 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Z2 D Example FIDE esse a 187 22 7 Applying Filters and Factory Defaults nnn senannerreenann eere enansnenenn 190 BRA Ethernet TANG an 190 224 2 Remote Node TI els aus o tta er 190 Chapter 23 deus e 192 AR DONE SIME ae ee 192 20 SUI MIBE Li ec E pt p RR a ee 193 293 NIE D OBNOUESUOIE an nn era 193 PA Ec Ter e 194 Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis esee 196 SAT SWEDEN sense 196 ZA SEEN SAME Er 196 24 3 Sys INFORMA eier 198 24 3 1 System INIGEDIBEOQN 2 cereis rnt beth bris A enen denn eden nee 198 24 32 Console POR SPEEN ans 199 EA Leg am Wels quU ebene 200 242 1 VAGUS Ener LEI cent 200 24 4 2 Syslog and ACCOUNTING sne nase aha iane 201 AE Ier EN 203 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 206 23 1 nEersu iiy e 206 EA BACK COMUNE m 207 23 2 1 Backup Cong prp epe n 207 25 2 2 Using the FTP Command from the Command Line 208 25 2 3 Example of FTP Commands from the Command Line 208 tua Rcs pale qm 209 25 2 5 TFTP and FTP over WAN Management Limitations 209 25 2 6 Backup Configuration Using TETE aan corna teda arne nk iira 210 23 2 7 FUP Command EXeHple
19. 6 6 Configuring WAN Setup To change your Prestige s WAN remote node settings click WAN and WAN Setup The screen differs by the encapsulation Chapter 6 WAN Setup 66 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 19 WAN Setup PPPoE WAN WAN Setup Name MyISP Mode Routing x Encapsulation PPPoE Multiplex LLC Virtual Circuit ID VPI vol ATM QoS Type Cell Rate Peak Cell Rate cellisec Sustain Cell Rate cellisec Maximum Burst Size Login Information Service Name User Name user isp ch Password IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address Connection Nailed Up Connection Connect on Demand Max Idle Timeout PPPoE Pass Through Zero Configuration Back Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 12 WAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION Name Enter the name of your Internet Service Provider e g MyISP This information is for identification purposes only Mode Select Routing default from the drop down list box if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account Otherwise select Bridge 67 Chapter 6 WAN Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 12 WAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Encapsulation Select the method of encapsulation used by your ISP from the drop down list box Choices vary depending on the mode you select in the Mode field If you select Bridg
20. Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for applications where NAT is not appropriate Press SPACE BAR to select No and press ENTER to disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 153 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 19 Static Route Setup This chapter shows how to setup IP static routes 19 1 IP Static Route Overview Static routes tell the Prestige routing information that it cannot learn automatically through other means This can arise in cases where RIP is disabled on the LAN or a remote network is beyond the one that is directly connected to a remote node Each remote node specifies only the network to which the gateway is directly connected and the Prestige has no knowledge of the networks beyond For instance the Prestige knows about network N2 in the following figure through remote node Router 1 However the Prestige is unable to route a packet to network N3 because it does not know that there is a route through remote node Router 1 via Router 2 The static routes allow you to tell the Presti
21. If the ISP or your network administrator assigns you a block of registered IP addresses follow their instructions in selecting the IP addresses and the subnet mask Chapter 3 Wizard Setup 44 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Ifthe ISP did not explicitly give you an IP network number then most likely you have a single user account and the ISP will assign you a dynamic IP address when the connection is established If this is the case it is recommended that you select a network number from 192 168 0 0 to 192 168 255 0 and you must enable the Network Address Translation NAT feature of the Prestige The Internet Assigned Number Authority IANA reserved this block of addresses specifically for private use please do not use any other number unless you are told otherwise Let s say you select 192 168 1 0 as the network number which covers 254 individual addresses from 192 168 1 1 to 192 168 1 254 zero and 255 are reserved In other words the first three numbers specify the network number while the last number identifies an individual computer on that network Once you have decided on the network number pick an IP address that is easy to remember for instance 192 168 1 1 for your Prestige but make sure that no other device on your network is using that IP address The subnet mask specifies the network number portion of an IP address Your Prestige will compute the subnet mask automatically based on the IP address that you ente
22. retype it to confirm and click Apply alternatively click Ignore to proceed to the main menu if you do not want to change the password now Note If you do not change the password the following screen appears every time you log in Figure 4 Change Password at Login Use this screen to change the password We recommend that you personalize the system administrator password by changing it to something besides the default 1234 The administrator password should must be between 1 30 characters New Password Retype to Confirm Ignore 7 You should now see the SITE MAP screen Note The Prestige automatically times out after five minutes of inactivity Simply log back into the Prestige if this happens to you 2 1 2 Resetting the Prestige If you forget your password or cannot access the web configurator you will need to use the RESET button at the back of the Prestige to reload the factory default configuration file This means that you will lose all configurations that you had previously and the password will be reset to 1234 2 1 2 1 Using the Reset Button 1 Make sure the PWR SYS LED is on not blinking 2 Press the RESET button for ten seconds or until the PWR SYS LED begins to blink and then release it When the PWR SYS LED begins to blink the defaults have been restored and the Prestige restarts 2 1 3 Navigating the Prestige Web Configurator The following summarizes how to navigate the w
23. to select Dynamic if the remote node is using Assignment a dynamically assigned IP address or Static if it is using a static fixed IP address You will only be able to configure this in the ISP node also the one you configure in menu 4 all other nodes are set to Static Rem IP Addr This is the IP address you entered in the previous menu Rem Subnet Type the subnet mask assigned to the remote node Mask My WAN Addr Some implementations especially UNIX derivatives require separate IP network numbers for the WAN and LAN links and each end to have a unique address within the WAN network number In that case type the IP address assigned to the WAN port of your Prestige NOTE Refers to local Prestige address not the remote router address NAT Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige Select SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige The SMT uses Address Mapping Set 255 menu 15 1 see Figure 97 Select None to disable NAT Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration 146 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 44 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Address Mapping Set When Full Feature is selected in the NAT field configure address mapping sets in menu 15 1 Select one of the NAT server sets 2 10 in menu 15 2 see Chapter 21 Network A
24. 0 0 End Port No All ports All ports Save Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 18 Edit SUA NAT Server Set LABEL DESCRIPTION Start Port No Enter a port number in this field To forward only one port enter the port number again in the End Port No field To forward a series of ports enter the start port number here and the end port number in the End Port No field End Port No Enter a port number in this field To forward only one port enter the port number again in the Start Port No field above and then enter it again in this field To forward a series of ports enter the last port number in a series that begins with the port number in the Start Port No field above IP Address Enter your server IP address in this field Save Click Save to save your changes back to the Prestige Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previous configuration 81 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 7 6 Configuring Address Mapping Ordering your rules is important because the Prestige applies the rules in the order that you specify When a rule matches the current packet the Prestige takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule your configured rule will be pushed up by that number o
25. 1 B T EL Lr IL Server in nr uad SG sales Network LAN2 192 168 2 X L IP 2 IGA 2 Network Server Ss 71 N ooo Sales 192 168 2 1 gt SES NTServer 192 168 2 1 Server In R amp D Network LAN3 192 168 3 X p Network Server en SEX TIPS IGA 3 R amp D 192 168 3 1 E ES WAN Addresses LAN Address es Default IPs NT server Mu SR IGA1 gt 192 168 1 1 le SEE IGA 2 192 168 2 1 IGA 3 192 168 3 1 7 1 5 NAT Mapping Types NAT supports five types of IP port mapping They are Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 76 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 7 2 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT One to One In One to One mode the Prestige maps one local IP address to one global IP address Many to One In Many to One mode the Prestige maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA for instance PAT port address translation ZyXEL s Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported the SUA Only option in today s routers Many to Many Overload In Many to Many Overload mode the Prestige maps the multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses Many to Many No Overload In Many to Many No Overload mode the Prestige maps each local IP address to a unique global IP address Server This type allows you to specify inside
26. 1 TCP IP Filter Rule FIELD DESCRIPTION Filter This is the filter set filter rule coordinates for instance 2 3 refers to the second filter set and the third filter rule of that set Filter Type Use SPACE BAR and then ENTER to choose a rule Parameters displayed for each type will be different Choices are TCP IP Filter Rule or Generic Filter Rule Active Select Yes to activate or No to deactivate the filter rule IP Protocol This is the upper layer protocol for example TCP is 6 UDP is 17 and ICMP is 1 The value must be between 0 and 255 A value of 0 matches ANY protocol IP Source Route IP Source Route is an optional header that dictates the route an IP packet takes from its source to its destination If Yes the rule applies to any packet with an IP source route The majority of IP packets do not have source route Destination IP Addr Type the destination IP address of the packet you want to filter This field is ignored if it is 0 0 0 0 IP Mask Type the IP mask to apply to the Destination IP Addr field Port Type the destination port of the packets you want to filter The field range is 0 to 65535 A 0 field is ignored Port Comp Select the comparison to apply to the destination port in the packet against the value given in Destination Port Choices are None Less Greater Equal or Not Equal Source IP Addr Type the source IP Address of the packet you want t
27. 1 VC based Multiplexing In this case by prior mutual agreement each protocol is assigned to a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 carries IP etc VC based multiplexing may be dominant in environments where dynamic creation of large numbers of ATM VCs is fast and economical 3 1 2 2 LLC based Multiplexing In this case one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header Despite the extra bandwidth and processing overhead this method may be advantageous if it is not practical to have a separate VC for each carried protocol for example if charging heavily depends on the number of simultaneous VCs 3 1 3 VPI and VCI Be sure to use the correct Virtual Path Identifier VPI and Virtual Channel Identifier VCI numbers assigned to you The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Please see the appendix for more information 3 1 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup First Screen In the SITE MAP screen click Wizard Setup to display the first wizard screen 43 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 6 Internet Access Wizard Setup First Screen Wizard Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access Mode Routing Encapsulation RFC 1483 Multiplex LLC Virtual Circuit ID VPI 8 Cl 35 The following table describes the labels in this screen
28. 132 50 1 IGA1 C 192 168 1 35 10 132 50 2 2 IGA2 10 132 50 3 2 IGA3 Other applications such as some gaming programs are NAT unfriendly because they embed addressing information in the data stream These applications won t work through NAT even when using One to One and Many to Many No Overload mapping types Follow the steps outlined in example 3 to configure these two menus as follows 175 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 114 Example 4 Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule Type Many to Many No Overload Local IP Start 192 168 1 10 End 192 168 1 12 Global IP Start 10 132 50 1 End 10 132 50 3 Server Mapping Set N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel After you ve configured your rule you should be able to check the settings in menu 15 1 1 as shown next Figure 115 Example 4 Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules Set Name Example4 Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type 1 192 168 1 10 192 168 1 12 10 132 50 1 10 132 50 3 M M NO OV 2x 3 4 5 6 74 8 93 1 0 Action Edit Select Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 176 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 177 Chapter 21 Network Address Translati
29. 168 1 33 Size of Client IP Pool 32 Change LAN Configuration Save Settings If you want to change your Prestige LAN settings click Change LAN Configuration to display the screen as shown next 51 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 12 Internet Access Wizard Setup LAN Configuration Connection Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access LAN IP Address LAN Subnet Mask DHCP Server Client IP Pool Starting Address Size of Client IP Poo Primary DNS Server Secondary DNS Server 192 168 1 1 255 255 255 0 ON E hd Back Finish The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 9 Internet Access Wizard Setup LAN Configuration LABEL DESCRIPTION LAN IP Address Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default Note If you changed the Prestige s LAN IP address you must use the new IP address if you want to access the web configurator again LAN Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation DHCP DHCP Server From the DHCP Server drop down list box select On to allow your Prestige to assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to computer systems that support the DHCP client Select Off to disable DHCP server When DHCP server is used set the following items Client IP Pool Starting Address This field speci
30. AP PASSES re ae 136 QI c eaten TENE 136 TE AS I E T T 137 T7 5 Ponte IP SEND uou usi conte etr eek Heike 138 17 6 Internet Access Configuration onsen KLD RE obi nic 139 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration annen seennenenennenennennnenneenneenneenenenn 142 18 1 Remote Mode Setup Overview esi asa deni nont ot Ge EISE haan dd a0 4458 142 18 2 Remo riii RP 142 1821 Remote Node Profile os esscc s cr aan 142 18 2 2 Encapsulation and Multiplexing Scenarios oneens eenen 143 18 2 2 1 Scenario 1 One VC Multiple Protocols 143 18 2 2 2 Scenario 2 One VC One Protocol IP cic ieri 143 18 2 53 Scenario 3 Multiple VOS ae 143 18 2 3 Outgoing Authentication Protocol ak 145 18 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options ecciesie tennis 146 18 3 1 My WAN Addr Sample IP Addresses sse 147 Tost Romolo Node Fler ach t EE 148 18 4 1 Web Configurator Internet Security Filter Rules 149 18 4 2 Web Configurator Filter Sets 11s ierra kt rk n kc 150 10 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 188 Editing ATM Layar OGG sa ern 151 18 5 1 VC based Multiplexing non PPP Encapsulation 151 18 5 2 LLC based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation 152 12 2 3 Advance seut ODBODS A 152 Chapter 19 Static Route SETUP usa eek 154 TOT IP Staic Route OVNE in 154 sn I A O 154 Chapter 20 BABEINS SEID NEN P TE 158 ZU Brain GGG RT 158 20 2 Bridge Et
31. End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type 1 0 00 20 255 259 255 255 040 050 M 1 2 0 0 0 0 Servert 3 4 5s 6 hes Bis 95 1 05 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table explains the fields in this menu gt gt Note Menu 15 1 255 is read only Table 50 SUA Address Mapping Rules FIELD DESCRIPTION Set Name This is the name of the set you selected in menu 15 1 or enter the name of a new set you want to create Idx This is the index or rule number Local Start IP Local Start IP is the starting local IP address ILA 165 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 50 SUA Address Mapping Rules continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Local End IP Local End IP is the ending local IP address ILA If the rule is for all local IPs then the Start IP is 0 0 0 0 and the End IP is 255 255 255 255 Global Start IP This is the starting global IP address IGA If you have a dynamic IP enter 0 0 0 0 as the Global Start IP Global End IP This is the ending global IP address IGA Type These are the mapping types Server allows us to specify multiple servers of different types behind NAT to this machine See later for some examples When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or
32. Error Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION s exceeds the max This attempt to create a NAT session exceeds the maximum number of session per number of NAT session table entries allowed to be created per host host setNetBIOSFilter calloc The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings error readNetBIOSFilter calloc The router failed to allocate memory for the NetBIOS filter settings error WAN connection is down A WAN connection is down You cannot access the network through this interface Table 99 Packet Filter Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION TCP UDP ICMP IGMP Attempted access matched a configured filter rule denoted by Generic packet filter its set and rule number and was blocked or forwarded matched set d rule d according to the rule Table 100 ICMP Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Packet without a NAT table entry The router blocked a packet that didn t have a blocked ICMP corresponding NAT table entry Router reply ICMP packet ICMP The router sent an ICMP reply packet to the sender Table 101 CDR Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION board d line d channel d The router received the setup requirements for a call call is call d s C01 Outgoing Call the reference count number of the call dev is the device type 3 is for dial up 6 is for PPPoE 10 is for PPTP channel or ch is the call ch
33. Figure 154 Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting Use Time Server when Bootup None Time Server Address N A Current Time 03 LO 50 New Time hh mm ss 082 m xp 43 Current Date 2000 01 01 New Date yyyy mm dd 2000 01 01 Time Zone GMT Daylight Saving No Start Date mm dd 01 00 End Date mm dd 01 00 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Table 69 Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting FIELD DESCRIPTION Use Time Server when Bootup Enter the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the Prestige Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to check with your ISP network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main differences between them are the format Daytime RFC 867 format is day month year time zone of the server Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 None The default enter the time manually Time Server Address Enter the IP address or domain name of your time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Current Time New Time This field displays an updated time only when you reenter this menu Enter the new time in h
34. Guide 241 Chapter 29 Call Scheduling Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 30 Troubleshooting This chapter covers potential problems and the corresponding remedies 30 1 Problems Starting Up the Prestige Table 74 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Prestige PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION None of the Make sure that the Prestige s power adaptor is connected to the Prestige and plugged LEDs turn on in to an appropriate power source Check that the Prestige and the power source are when turn on both turned on the Prestige Turn the Prestige off and on If the error persists you may have a hardware problem In this case you should contact your vendor 30 2 Problems with the LAN LED Table 75 Troubleshooting the LAN LED PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION The LAN LEDs Check your Ethernet cable connections and type refer to the Quick Start Guide for do not turn on details Check for faulty Ethernet cables Make sure your computer s Ethernet card is working properly Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 242 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 30 3 Problems with the DSL LED Table 76 Troubleshooting the DSL LED PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION The DSL LED is off Check the telephone wire and connections between the Prestige DSL port and the wall jack Make sure that the telephone company has checked your phone line and set it up for DSL service
35. IP Policies 1 2 Edit IP Alias No H Press E ER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing 236 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 237 Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 29 Call Scheduling Call scheduling applicable for PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation only allows you to dictate when a remote node should be called and for how long 29 1 Introduction The call scheduling feature allows the Prestige to manage a remote node and dictate when a remote node should be called and for how long This feature is similar to the scheduler in a videocassette recorder you can specify a time period for the VCR to record You can apply up to 4 schedule sets in Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile From the main menu enter 26 to access Menu 26 Schedule Setup as shown next Figure 165 Menu 26 Schedule Setup Menu 26 Schedule Setup Schedule Schedule Set Name Set Name Enter Schedule Set Number to Configure 0 Edit Name N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Lower numbered sets take precedence over higher numbered sets thereby avoiding scheduling conflicts For example if sets 1 2 3 and 4 in are applied in the remote node then set 1 will take precedence over set 2 3 and 4 as the Prestige by default applies the lowest numbered set first Set 2 wi
36. IP Routing Policy Setup Menu 21 tam P assw 1 4 Configration Men x nc F ilter Rule Menu242 Miru 242 1 System Information and PB System Maintenance Console pat Speed hiomaton Menu 24 11 emote Manage me System Murderance Upload System Configuration File System Martorence Upload System Frmware 13 2 Navigating the SMT Interface The SMT System Management Terminal is the interface that you use to configure your Prestige 119 Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Several operations that you should be familiar with before you attempt to modify the configuration are listed in the table below Table 32 Navigating the SMT Interface OPERATION KEY STROKE DESCRIPTION Move down to ENTER To move forward to a submenu type in the number of the another menu desired submenu and press ENTER Move up toa ESC Press ESC to move back to the previous menu previous menu Move to a hidden menu Press SPACE BAR to change No to Yes then press ENTER Fields beginning with Edit lead to hidden menus and have a default setting of No Press SPACE BAR once to change No to Yes then press ENTER to go to the hidden menu Move the cursor ENTER or UPY DOWN arrow keys Within a menu press ENTER to move to the next field You can also use the UP DOWN arrow keys to move to the previous and the next field respectively When you are
37. In the Network window click Add 2 Select Protocol and then click Add 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select TCP IP from the list of network protocols and then click OK If you need Client for Microsoft Networks 1 Click Add 2 Select Client and then click Add 249 Appendix B Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 3 Select Microsoft from the list of manufacturers 4 Select Client for Microsoft Networks from the list of network clients and then click OK 5 Restart your computer so the changes you made take effect Configuring 1 In the Network window Configuration tab select your network adapter s TCP IP entry and click Properties 2 Click the IP Address tab If your IP address is dynamic select Obtain an IP address automatically Ifyou have a static IP address select Specify an IP address and type your information into the IP Address and Subnet Mask fields Figure 172 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address Bindings Advanced NetBlos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address An IP address can be automatically assigned to this computer If your network does not automatically assign IP addresses ask your network administrator for an address and then type it in the space below C Specify an IP address IV Detect connection to network media Cancel 3 Click the DNS Configuration tab If you do not know your DNS informati
38. NNNNNNN NN NN 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PP12 PPOO PPOO PPOO PPOO PPlc PPOa PPO9 PP1b PP14 PPOO PPOO INFO INFO WARN LAN promiscuous mode lt 1 gt Last errorlog repeat 1 Times SNMP TRAP 0 cold start main init completed Starting Connectivity Monitor monitoring WAN connectivity MPOA SNMP Link Down TRAP 3 link up adjtime task pause 1 day SMT Password pass SMT Session Begin MlSave Iface not found for DDNS 24 4 2 Syslog and Accounting The Prestige uses the syslog facility to log the CDR Call Detail Record and system messages to a syslog server Syslog and accounting can be configured in Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance UNIX Syslog as shown next Figure 139 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting UNIX Syslog Active No Syslog IP Address Log Facility Local 1 Types CDR No Pac Fil PPP Press ket ter Log Log No ENT No Triggered No ER to Confirm or Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance UNIX Syslog ESC to Cancel You need to configure the UNIX syslog parameters described in the following table to activate syslog then choose what you want to log Table 63 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting PARAMETER DESCRIPTION UNIX Syslog Active Use SPACE BAR and then ENTER to turn syslog on or off
39. Network Address Translation NAT for more details on the SUA Single User Account feature Address Mapping Set Type the numbers of mapping sets 1 8 to use with NAT See Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT for details When you have completed this menu press ENTER atthe prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel If all your settings are correct your Prestige should connect automatically to the Internet If the connection fails note the error message that you receive on the screen and take the appropriate troubleshooting steps 141 Chapter 17 Internet Access Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 18 Remote Node Configuration This chapter covers remote node configuration 18 1 Remote Node Setup Overview This section describes the protocol independent parameters for a remote node A remote node is required for placing calls to a remote gateway A remote node represents both the remote gateway and the network behind it across a WAN connection When you use menu 4 to set up Internet access you are configuring one of the remote nodes You first choose a remote node in Menu 11 Remote Node Setup You can then edit that node s profile in menu 11 1 as well as configure specific settings in three submenus edit IP and bridge options in menu 11 3 edit ATM options in menu 11 6 and edit filter se
40. Networking Services window select the Universal Plug and Play check box Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 98 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 39 Networking Services Networking Services To add or remove a component click the check box amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Subcomponents of Networking Services O RIP Listener 0 0 MB A Simple TCP IP Services 0 0 MB sal Plug and Play 0 2 MB Description Allows your computer to discover and control Universal Plug and Play devices Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 8 MB 6 Click OK to go back to the Windows Optional Networking Component Wizard window and click Next 11 4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example This section shows you how to use the UPnP feature in Windows XP You must already have UPnP installed in Windows XP and UPnP activated on the Prestige Make sure the computer is connected to a LAN port of the Prestige Turn on your computer and the Prestige Auto discover Your UPnP enabled Network Device 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Network Connections An icon displays under Internet Gateway 2 Right click the icon and select Properties 99 Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 40 Network Connections Network Conne
41. Policy Routing 232 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 159 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup DHCP Setup DHCP Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 Size of Client IP Pool 32 Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server N A TCP IP Setup IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 RIP Direction Both Version RIP 1 ulticast None IP Policies 2 4 7 9 Edit IP Alias No ESC to Cancel R to Confirm or ENTE Press Go to menu 11 3 shown next and type the number s of the IP Routing Policy set s as appropriate You can cascade up to four policy sets by typing their numbers separated by commas Figure 160 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options IP Address Assignment Static Rem IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Rem Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 y WAN Addr 0 0 0 0 AT Full Feature Address Mapping Set 2 etric 2 Private No RIP Direction Both Version RIP 2B ulticast IGMP v2 IP Policies 2 4 7 9 Bridge Options Ethernet Addr Timeout min 0 ENT ESC to Cancel ER to Confirm or Press 28 6 IP Policy Routing Example If a network has both Internet and remote node connections you can route Web packets to the Internet using one policy and route FTP packets to a remote
42. Sustain Cell Rate SCR 68 Sustained Cell Rate SCR 65 Syntax Conventions 26 Syslog 201 Syslog IP Address 201 Syslog Server 201 System Console Port Speed 199 Diagnostic 203 Log and Trace 200 Syslog and Accounting 201 System Information 198 System Status 196 System Information 198 System Information amp Diagnosis 196 System Maintenance 196 198 207 210 215 218 219 221 System Management Terminal 119 System Status 197 System Timeout 91 226 T TCP IP 91 187 204 Telnet 91 118 Telnet Configuration 91 TFTP Restrictions 225 TFTP File Transfer 215 TFTP Restrictions 90 209 Time and Date Setting 220 Time Zone 221 Timeout 129 TOS Type of Service 228 Trace Records 200 Traffic Redirect 69 70 Setup 129 Traffic redirect 69 traffic redirect 31 Traffic shaping 65 Transmission Rates 31 Type of Service 228 230 231 232 U UBR Unspecified Bit Rate 68 Universal Plug and Play 94 Application 94 Security issues 94 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 31 Universal Plug and Play Forum 95 UNIX Syslog 200 201 UNIX syslog parameters 201 Upload Firmware 213 UPnP 94 User Name 87 V VBR Variable Bit Rate 68 VC based Multiplexing 143 Virtual Channel Identifier VCI 43 virtual circuit VC 43 Virtual Path Identifier VPI 43 VPI amp VCI 43 284 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide W WAN Wide Area Network 64 WAN backup 70 WAN Setup 128 Web Configurator 38 39 40 web configu
43. System 57 Filtering Process DSL Digital Subscriber Line 28 Outgoing Packets 178 DSL line reinitialize 115 Finger 79 firmware 116 206 upload 116 upload error 117 DSL What Is It 28 DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer 35 Dynamic DNS 32 86 125 Frame Relay 35 dynamic DNS 32 126 FTP 78 90 225 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol 33 Restrictions 225 DYNDNS Wildcard 86 FTP File Transfer 213 FTP Restrictions 90 209 FTP Server 173 E Full Rate 246 ECHO 78 embedded help 40 G Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol ENET ENCAP 42 Encapsulation 34 42 140 143 Gateway 156 ENET ENCAP 42 PPP over Ethernet 42 Gateway Node 159 PPPoA 42 General Setup 124 RFC 1483 43 Generic filter 187 encapsulation 34 Graphical User Interface GUI 30 Error Log 200 H F hardware problem 242 Factory LAN Defaults 58 Hidden Menus 120 faulty Ethernet cables 242 Hop Count 147 156 Filename Conventions 206 Host 54 filename conventions 207 Host IDs 260 Filter 132 178 HTTP 79 Applying Filters 190 HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol 116 Ethernet Traffic 190 Ethernet traffic 190 Filter Rules 181 Filter structure 179 Generic Filter Rule 185 Remote Node 148 Remote Node Filter 148 IANA 46 Remote Node Filters 190 Idle timeout 145 SUA 187 TCP IP Filter Rule 182 IGMP Support 447 Install UPnP 96 Filter Log 203 Windows Me 96 Filter Rule Process 179 Windows XP 97 281 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Int
44. System Information 1 Enter 24 to display Menu 24 System Maintenance 2 Enter 2 to display Menu 24 2 System Information and Console Port Speed From this menu you have two choices as shown in the next figure Figure 134 Menu 24 2 System Information and Console Port Speed Menu 24 2 System Information and Console Port Speed 1 System Information 2 Console Port Speed Pleas nter selection Note The Prestige has an internal console port for support personnel only Do not open the Prestige as it will void your warranty 24 3 1 System Information Enter 1 in menu 24 2 to display the screen shown next Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis 198 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 135 Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information Name Routing IP ZyNOS F W Version V3 40 ST 0 12 16 2004 ADSL Chipset Vendor DMT FwVer 3 0 10 3 A TC HwVer T14F7 0 Standard Multi Mode LA Ethernet Address 00 a0 c5 01 23 45 IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server Press ESC or RETURN to Exit The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 62 Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information FIELD DESCRIPTION Name Displays the system name of your Prestige This information can be changed in Menu 1 General Setup Routing Refers to the routing protocol used ZyNOS F W
45. System Management Terminal SMT or command interpreter interface to configure your Prestige Not all features can be configured through all interfaces Syntax Conventions Enter means for you to type one or more characters Select or Choose means for you to use one predefined choices The SMT menu titles and labels are in Bold Times New Roman font Predefined field choices are in Bold Arial font Command and arrow keys are enclosed in square brackets ENTER means the Enter or carriage return key ESC means the Escape key and SPACE BAR means the Space Bar Mouse action sequences are denoted using a comma For example click the Apple icon Control Panels and then Modem means first click the Apple icon then point your mouse pointer to Control Panels and then click Modem e For brevity s sake we will use e g as a shorthand for for instance and i e for that is or in other words throughout this manual The Prestige 660RU Tx series may be referred to as the Prestige in this user s guide This refers to both models ADSL over POTS and ADSL over ISDN unless specifically identified Related Documentation e Supporting Disk Refer to the included CD for support documents Quick Start Guide Preface 26 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The Quick Start Guide is designed to help you get up and running right away They contain connection information
46. Table 43 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Authen This field sets the authentication protocol used for outgoing calls Options for this field are CHAP PAP Your Prestige will accept either CHAP or PAP when requested by this remote node CHAP accept CHAP Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol only PAP accept PAP Password Authentication Protocol only Route This field determines the protocol used in routing Options are IP and None Bridge When bridging is enabled your Prestige will forward any packet that it does not route to this remote node otherwise the packets are discarded Select Yes to enable and No to disable Edit IP Bridge Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER to display Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Edit ATM Options Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER to display Menu 11 6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options Edit Advance This field is only available when you select PPPOE in the Encapsulation field Options Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER to display Menu 11 8 Advance Setup Options Telco Option Allocated Budget min This sets a ceiling for outgoing call time for this remote node The default for this field is 0 meaning no budget control Period hr This field is the time period that the budget should be reset For example if we are allowed to call thi
47. a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use put to transfer files from the computer to the Prestige for example put firmware bin ras transfers the firmware on your computer firmware bin to the Prestige and renames it ras Similarly put config rom rom 0 transfers the configuration file on your computer config rom to the Prestige and renames it rom 0 Likewise get rom 0 config rom transfers the configuration file on the Prestige to your computer and renames it config rom See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt gt gt Note The Prestige automatically restarts after a successful file upload Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 214 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 25 4 4 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload Figure 148 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload 331 Enter PASS command Password 230 Logged in ftp gt bin 200 Type I OK ftp gt put firmware bin ras 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK ftp 1103936 bytes sent in 1 10Seconds 297 89Kbytes sec ftp gt quit More commands found in GUI based FTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter Refer to the TFTP and FTP over WAN Management Limitations se
48. aa 210 25 2 0 CONTI ed TFTE CIS serrandi 210 292 Restore CONTI eek 211 VHSMNIIIcO ISP PI ET 211 25 3 2 Restore Using FTP Session Example eese 212 25 4 Uploading Firmware and Configuration Files nnn oenen enenenen 213 254 1 Firmware File UPa ee ee 213 25 4 2 Configuration File Upload 225 2 ana on ad ba iced 213 25 4 3 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example 214 12 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 25 4 4 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload 213 23 2 2 TEE PIE UDIO neuen een EEANN DEENA ESE NA 215 2546 TFTP Upload Command Exemple aan an 216 Chapter 26 System Maintenance anne kenkehn an haha de hkaneu kann elser 218 26 1 Command Interpreter MOOG aan 218 202 Call Conrol SUPRON ee 219 2032 1 Budget Management as 219 26 3 ime and Date Seting ana a otha lensen derden akses 220 20 31 Resetting Ihe TIME T 221 Chapter 27 Remote Management Y e 7 224 27 1 Remote Management Overview nnnssunurnsannernennsnnnere natant d assa nena dana 224 27 2 Pomot ps PM a 224 27 2 1 Remote Management Setup aussen 224 27 2 2 Remote Management Limitations nanne nennen rennen vens enenen 225 27 3 Remote Management and NAT asien aa 226 ZA Ryo WEEDS Ae 226 Chapter 28 IP POE ROUNO S TA 228 28 1 IP Polley Roving Var sec 228 28 2 Benefits of IF P
49. are from the present to 2036 12 31 How Often Should this schedule set recur weekly or be used just once only Press the SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Once or Weekly Both these options are mutually exclusive If Once is selected then all weekday settings are N A When Once is selected the schedule rule deletes automatically after the scheduled time elapses Once If you selected Once in the How Often field above then enter the date the set should Date activate here in year month date format Weekday If you selected Weekly in the How Often field above then select the day s when the Day set should activate and recur by going to that day s and pressing SPACE BAR to select Yes then press ENTER Start Time Enter the start time when you wish the schedule set to take effect in hour minute format Duration Enter the maximum length of time this connection is allowed in hour minute format 239 Chapter 29 Call Scheduling Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 73 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup continued FIELD DESCRIPTION call on the line Action Forced On means that the connection is maintained whether or not there is a demand call on the line and will persist for the time period specified in the Duration field Forced Down means that the connection is blocked whether or not there is a demand Enable Dial On Demand means that this schedule permits a demand call on the li
50. areas anak end REL kin EEren c 234 Figure 162 IF Routing Policy Example T ask 234 Figure 1631P Routing Foly Example 2 ae a a ai 235 Figure 164 Applying IP Policies Example ccccececcceeeeeeeceeeeseeeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeneeeceeeennenee 236 Figure 165 Menu 26 Schedule SUP araber nen nce a 238 19 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 166 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Slip au 239 Figure 167 Applying Schedule Set s to a Remote Node PPPOE ee 240 Figure 168 Connecting a POTS Splitier nrsssorcsennmerorndddecrkasrindneeranrrnddnet Ebo rra dor patte da aao den 246 Figure 169 Connecting a Michiel eenander a 247 igure 170 Preslige WEN ISDN ecce a NANA 247 Figure 171 WIndows 95 98 Me Network Configuration see 249 Figure 172 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties IP Address nonnen ennen 250 Figure 173 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration 251 Figure 174 Windows XP Stat MENG eek 252 Figure 175 Windows XP Control Panel wanneer reek rekenen 232 Figure 176 Windows XP Control Panel Network Connections Properties 253 Figure 177 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties saneren ennn 293 Figure 178 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Settings secet 254 Figure 179 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties eee 255 Figure 180 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu 2444400000nnnnnn
51. at the top of a menu press the UP arrow key to move to the bottom of a menu Entering Type in or press You need to fill in two types of fields The first requires you to information SPACE BAR type in the appropriate information The second allows you to then press cycle through the available choices by pressing SPACE BAR ENTER Required fields lt gt or All fields with the symbol lt gt must be filled in order to be able ChangeMe to save the new configuration All fields with ChangeMe must not be left blank in order to be able to save the new configuration N A fields lt N A gt Some of the fields in the SMT will show a lt N A gt This symbol refers to an option that is Not Applicable Save your ENTER Save your configuration by pressing ENTER at the message configuration Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel Saving the data on the screen will take you in most cases to the previous menu Make sure you save your settings in each screen that you configure Exit the SMT Type 99 then press ENTER Type 99 at the main menu prompt and press ENTER to exit the SMT interface Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT 120 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide After you enter the password the SMT displays the main menu as shown next Table 33 SMT Main Menu Copyright c Getting Started 1 General Setup WAN Backup Setup fit 3 LAN Setup 4 Internet Access Setup 2
52. is located relative to the Prestige for example the computers of your subscribers are the inside hosts while the web servers on the Internet are the outside hosts Global local denotes the IP address of a host in a packet as the packet traverses a router for example the local address refers to the IP address of a host when the packet is in the local network while the global address refers to the IP address of the host when the same packet is traveling in the WAN side Note that inside outside refers to the location of a host while global local refers to the IP address of a host used in a packet Thus an inside local address ILA is the IP address of an inside host in a packet when the packet is still in the local network while an inside global address IGA is the IP address of the same inside host when the packet is on the WAN side The following table summarizes this information Table 14 NAT Definitions ITEM DESCRIPTION Inside This refers to the host on the LAN Outside This refers to the host on the WAN Local This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the LAN Global This refers to the packet address source or destination as the packet travels on the WAN Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 74 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Note NAT never changes the IP address either local or global of an outside host 7 1 2 Wh
53. is not applicable available when you configure the Prestige to use a static WAN IP address or in bridge mode Select Yes to set the Prestige to automatically detect the Internet connection settings such as the VCI VPI numbers and the encapsulation method from the ISP and make the necessary configuration changes Select No to disable this feature You must manually configure the Prestige for Internet access Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 6 7 Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards traffic to a backup gateway when the Prestige cannot connect to the Internet An example is shown in the figure below Chapter 6 WAN Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 20 Traffic Redirect Example LAN Backup Gateway The following network topology allows you to avoid triangle route security issues when the backup gateway is connected to the LAN Use IP alias to configure the LAN into two or three logical networks with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network Put the protected LAN in one subnet Subnet 1 in the following figure and the backup gateway in another subnet Subnet 2 Configure filters that allow packets from the protected LAN Subnet 1 to the backup gateway Subnet 2 Figure 21 Traffic Redirect LAN Setup Subnet 1 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 LI
54. manual intervention It allows data transfer of either 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps in either half duplex or full duplex mode depending on your Ethernet network Auto Crossover MDI MDI X 10 100 Mbps Ethernet Interface s These interfaces automatically adjust to either a crossover or straight through Ethernet cable Dynamic DNS Support With Dynamic DNS support you can have a static hostname alias for a dynamic IP address allowing the host to be more easily accessible from various locations on the Internet You must register for this service with a Dynamic DNS service provider Multiple PVC Permanent Virtual Circuits Support Your Prestige supports up to 8 PVC s ADSL Standards Full Rate ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 G dmt G 992 1 with line rate support of up to 8 Mbps downstream and 832 Kbps upstream G lite G 992 2 with line rate support of up to 1 5Mbps downstream and 512Kbps upstream Supports Multi Mode standard ANSI T1 413 Issue 2 G dmt G 992 1 G lite G992 2 TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol network layer protocol ATM Forum UNI 3 1 4 0 PVC Supports up to 8 PVCs UBR CBR VBR Multiple Protocol over AALS RFC 1483 e Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige 32 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide PPP over AALS RFC 2364 PPP over Ethernet over AALS RFC 2516 RFC 1661 PPP over PAP RFC 1334 PPP over CHAP RFC 1994 Protocol Support e e e DHCP Supp
55. name with a bin extension for example Prestige bin The upload process uses HTTP Hypertext Transfer Protocol and may take up to two minutes After a successful upload the system will reboot See Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance in the parts that document the SMT for upgrading firmware using FTP TFTP commands Note Only use firmware for your device s specific model Refer to the label on the bottom of your device Click Firmware to open the following screen Follow the instructions in this screen to upload firmware to your Prestige Figure 55 Firmware Upgrade FIRMWARE Firmware Upgrade To upgrade the internal router firmware browse to the location ofthe binary BIN upgrade file and click UPLOAD File Path Browse Upload CONFIGURATION FILE Click Reset to clear all user defined configurations and return to the factory defaults Reset The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 31 Firmware Upgrade LABEL DESCRIPTION File Path Type in the location of the file you want to upload in this field or click Browse to find it Browse Click Browse to find the bin file you want to upload Remember that you must decompress compressed zip files before you can upload them Upload Click Upload to begin the upload process This process may take up to two minutes Reset Click this button to clear all user entered configuration information and re
56. of the Prestige first This comes helpful if you do not know the IP address of the Prestige Follow the steps below to access the web configurator 1 Click Start and then Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 Select My Network Places under Other Places 103 Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 46 Network Connections Network Connections File Q Back d po Search li Folders EIN Address Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help e Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks Internet Connection Disabled Internet Connection 5 Create a new connection Set up a home or small office network LAN or High Speed Internet Local Area Connection Enabled E a Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast See Also Network Troubleshooter Other Places de Control Panel amp My Network Places i My Documents E My Computer Details Network Connections System Folder Network Connections 4 An icon with the description for each UPnP enabled device displays under Local Network 5 Right click on the icon for your Prestige and select Invoke The web configurator login screen displays Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 104 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 47 Network Connections My Network Places My Network Places File Edit View Favorites Tools Help o Bac
57. part of the host ID using a logical AND operation A subnet mask has 32 is a 1 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the network number If a bit in the subnet mask is 0 then the corresponding bit in the IP address is part of the host ID Subnet masks are expressed in dotted decimal notation just as IP addresses are The natural masks for class A B and C IP addresses are as follows Table 85 Natural Masks CLASS NATURAL MASK A 255 0 0 0 B 255 255 0 0 C 255 255 255 0 Subnetting With subnetting the class arrangement of an IP address is ignored For example a class C address no longer has to have 24 bits of network number and 8 bits of host ID With subnetting some of the host ID bits are converted into network number bits By convention subnet masks always consist of a continuous sequence of ones beginning from the left most bit of the mask followed by a continuous sequence of zeros for a total number of 32 bits 261 Appendix C Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Since the mask is always a continuous number of ones beginning from the left followed by a continuous number of zeros for the remainder of the 32 bit mask you can simply specify the number of ones instead of writing the value of each octet This is usually specified by writing a followed by the number of bits in the mask after the address For example 192 1 1 0 25 is equivalent
58. press ESC at any time to cancel 21 3 1 2 User Defined Address Mapping Sets Now let s look at option 1 in menu 15 1 Enter 1 to bring up this menu We ll just look at the differences from the previous menu Note the extra Action and Select Rule fields mean you can configure rules in this screen Note also that the in the Set Name field means that this is a required field and you must enter a name for the set Figure 99 Menu 15 1 1 First Set Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules Set Name ACL Default Set Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type 1g 2 Sx 4 5 6 Ts 8 9 10 Action Edit Select Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Note If the Set Name field is left blank the entire set will be deleted Note The Type Local and Global Start End IPs are configured in menu 15 1 1 1 described later and the values are displayed here Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 166 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 21 3 1 3 Ordering Your Rules Ordering your rules is important because the Prestige applies the rules in the order that you specify When a rule matches the current packet the Prestige takes the corresponding action and the remaining rules are ignored If there are any empty rules before your new configured rule your configured rule will be pushed up by that number of empty rules For example if you have
59. rate of each bursty traffic source It specifies the maximum average rate at which cells can be sent over the virtual connection SCR may not be greater than the PCR Maximum Burst Size MBS is the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the PCR After MBS is reached cell rates fall below SCR until cell rate averages to the SCR again At this time more cells up to the MBS can be sent at the PCR again If the PCR SCR or MBS is set to the default of 0 the system will assign a maximum value that correlates to your upstream line rate The following figure illustrates the relationship between PCR SCR and MBS 65 Chapter 6 WAN Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 18 Example of Traffic Shaping Cell Rate PC SCR i ies Time MBS MBS 6 5 Zero Configuration Internet Access Once you turn on and connect the Prestige to a telephone jack it automatically detects the Internet connection settings such as the VCI VPI numbers and the encapsulation method from the ISP and makes the necessary configuration changes In cases where additional account information such as an Internet account user name and password is required or the Prestige cannot connect to the ISP you will be redirected to web screen s for information input or troubleshooting Zero configuration for Internet access is disable when the Prestige is in bridge mode you set the Prestige to use a static fixed WAN IP address
60. restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the Network window Appendix B 258 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 259 Appendix B Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Appendix C IP Subnetting IP Addressing Routers route based on the network number The router that delivers the data packet to the correct destination host uses the host ID IP Classes An IP address is made up of four octets eight bits written in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 IP addresses are categorized into different classes The class of an address depends on the value of its first octet Class A addresses have a 0 in the left most bit In a class A address the first octet is the network number and the remaining three octets make up the host ID Class B addresses have a 1 in the left most bit and a 0 in the next left most bit In a class B address the first two octets make up the network number and the two remaining octets make up the host ID e Class C addresses begin starting from the left with 1 1 0 In a class C address the first three octets make up the network number and the last octet is the host ID e Class D addresses begin with 1 1 1 0 Class D addresses are used for multicasting There is also a class E address It 1s reserved for future use Table 83 Classes of IP Addresses
61. servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world gt gt Note Port numbers do not change for One to One and Many to Many No Overload NAT mapping types The following table summarizes these types Table 15 NAT Mapping Types TYPE IP MAPPING SMT ABBREVIATION One to One ILA1 gt IGA1 1 1 Many to One SUA PAT ILA1 gt IGA1 ILA2 gt IGA1 M 1 Many to Many Overload ILA1 gt IGA1 ILA2 gt IGA2 ILA3 gt IGA1 ILA4 IGA2 M M Ov Many to Many No Overload ILA1 gt IGA1 ILA2 amp IGA2 ILA3 gt IGAS M M No OV Server Server 1 IP IGA1 Server 2 IP IGA1 Server 3 IP IGA1 Server SUA Single User Account is a ZyNOS implementation of a subset of NAT that supports two types of mapping Many to One and Server The Prestige also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types as outlined in Table 15 77 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Note 1 Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige 2 Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige 7 3 SUA Server A SUA server set is a list of inside behind NAT on the LAN servers for example web or FTP that
62. settings assigned automatically if your network supports this capability Otherwise you need to ask your network administrator for the appropriate IP settings G Obtain an IP address automatically Use the following IP address Obtain DNS server address automatically Use the following DNS server addresses 8 Click OK to close the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window 9 Click OK to close the Local Area Connection Properties window 10Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start All Programs Accessories and then Command Prompt 2 In the Command Prompt window type ipconfig and then press ENTER You can also open Network Connections right click a network connection click Status and then click the Support tab Macintosh OS 8 9 1 Click the Apple menu Control Panel and double click TCP IP to open the TCP IP Control Panel 255 Appendix B Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 180 Macintosh OS 8 9 Apple Menu File Edit View Window Special Help About This Computer D Apple System Profiler E Calculator gt Chooser Control Panels Favorites d Key Caps Network Browser Gi Recent Applications amp Recent Documents Elf Remote Access Status Scrapbook 49 Sherlock 2 j Speakable Items Stickies ADSL Control and Status Appearance Apple Menu Options AppleTalk ColorSync Control Strip
63. source you will need to rename them as the Prestige only recognizes rom 0 and ras Be sure you keep unaltered copies of both files for later use Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 206 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The following table is a summary Please note that the internal filename refers to the filename on the Prestige and the external filename refers to the filename not on the Prestige that is on your computer local network or FTP site and so the name but not the extension may vary After uploading new firmware see the ZyNOS F W Version field in Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information to confirm that you have uploaded the correct firmware version The AT command is the command you enter after you press y when prompted in the SMT menu to go into debug mode Table 65 Filename Conventions FILE TYPE INTERNAL NAME EXTERNAL NAME DESCRIPTION Configuration Rom 0 This is the configuration filename on the rom File Prestige Uploading the rom 0 file replaces the entire ROM file system including your Prestige configurations system related data including the default password the error log and the trace log Firmware Ras This is the generic name for the ZyNOS firmware bin on the Prestige 25 2 Backup Configuration Option 5 from Menu 24 System Maintenance allows you to backup the current Prestige configuration to your computer
64. subnet 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 is the subnet itself and 192 168 1 127 with mask 255 255 255 128 1s the directed broadcast address for the first subnet Therefore the lowest IP address that can be assigned to an actual host for the first subnet is 192 168 1 1 and the highest is 192 168 1 126 Similarly the host ID range for the second subnet is 192 168 1 129 to 192 168 1 254 263 Appendix C Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Example Four Subnets The above example illustrated using a 25 bit subnet mask to divide a class C address space into two subnets Similarly to divide a class C address into four subnets you need to borrow two host ID bits to give four possible combinations of 00 01 10 and 11 The subnet mask is 26 bits 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 or 255 255 255 192 Each subnet contains 6 host ID bits giving 2 2 or 62 hosts for each subnet all 0 s is the subnet itself all 1 s is the broadcast address on the subnet Table 90 Subnet 1 NETWORK NUMBER ee BIE IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 62 192 168 1 63 Table 91 Subnet 2 NETWORK NUMBER ae BIE IP Address 192 168 1 64 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101
65. table Table 43 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile FIELD DESCRIPTION Rem Node Name Type a unique descriptive name of up to eight characters for this node Active Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes to activate or No to deactivate this node Inactive nodes are displayed with a minus sign in SMT menu 11 Encapsulation PPPoA refers to RFC 2364 PPP Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 If RFC 1483 Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 of ENET ENCAP are selected then the Rem Login Rem Password My Login My Password and Authen fields are not applicable N A Multiplexing Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the method of multiplexing that your ISP uses either VC based or LLC based Service Name When using PPPoE encapsulation type the name of your PPPoE service here Incoming Rem Login Type the login name that this remote node will use to call your Prestige The login name and the Rem Password will be used to authenticate this node Rem Password Type the password used when this remote node calls your Prestige Outgoing My Login Type the login name assigned by your ISP when the Prestige calls this remote node My Password Type the password assigned by your ISP when the Prestige calls this remote node Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration 144 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide
66. the action for a packet not matching the rule Choices are Check Next Rule Matched Forward or Drop When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 22 5 Filter Types and NAT There are two classes of filter rules Generic Filter Device rules and Protocol Filter TCP IP rules Generic Filter rules act on the raw data from to LAN and WAN Protocol Filter rules act on IP packets When NAT Network Address Translation is enabled the inside IP address and port number are replaced on a connection by connection basis which makes it impossible to know the exact address and port on the wire Therefore the Prestige applies the protocol filters to the native IP address and port number before NAT for outgoing packets and after NAT for incoming packets On the other hand the generic or device filters are applied to the raw packets that appear on the wire They are applied at the point where the Prestige is receiving and sending the packets for instance the interface The interface can be an Ethernet or any other hardware port The following figure illustrates this Figure 124 Protocol and Device Filter Sets 22 6 Example Filter Let s look at an example to block outside users from telnetting into the Prestige 187 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s
67. to saying 192 1 1 0 with mask 255 255 255 128 The following table shows all possible subnet masks for a class C address using both notations Table 86 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation SUBNET MASK IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK 1 BITS LAST OCTET BIT VALUE 255 255 255 0 124 0000 0000 255 255 255 128 125 1000 0000 255 255 255 192 126 1100 0000 255 255 255 224 127 1110 0000 255 255 255 240 128 1111 0000 255 255 255 248 129 1111 1000 255 255 255 252 30 1111 1100 The first mask shown is the class C natural mask Normally if no mask is specified it is understood that the natural mask is being used Example Two Subnets As an example you have a class C address 192 168 1 0 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 Table 87 Two Subnets Example NETWORK NUMBER HOST ID IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 00000000 The first three octets of the address make up the network number class C You want to have two separate networks Appendix C 262 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Divide the network 192 168 1 0 into two separate subnets by converting one of the host ID bits of the IP address to a network number bit The borrowed host ID bit can be either 0 or 1 thus giving two subnets 192 168 1 0 with mask 255 255 255
68. types Global Start IP This is the starting global IP address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP Global End IP This is the ending global IP address IGA This field is N A for One to One Many to One and Server mapping types Server Mapping Only available when Type is set to Server Set Select a number from the drop down menu to choose a server set from the NAT Address Mapping Rules screen Edit Details Click this link to go to the NAT Edit SUA NAT Server Set screen to edit a server set that you have selected in the Server Mapping Set field Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings Delete Click Delete to exit this screen without saving Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 84 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 85 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 8 Dynamic DNS Setup This chapter discusses how to configure your Prestige to use Dynamic DNS 8 1 Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS allows you to update your current dynamic IP address with one or many dynamic DNS services so that anyone can contact you in NetMeeting CU SeeMe etc You can also access your FTP server or Web site on your own computer using a domain name for instance myhost dhs org where myhost is a name of your choice that will never chang
69. variables within an agent Trap Used by the agent to inform the manager of some events 23 2 Supported MIBs The Prestige supports RFC 1215 and MIB II as defined in RFC 1213 as well as ZyXEL private MIBs The focus of the MIBs is to let administrators collect statistic data and monitor status and performance 23 3 SNMP Configuration To configure SNMP select option 22 from the main menu to open Menu 22 SNMP Configuration as shown next The community for Get Set and Trap fields is SNMP terminology for password Figure 131 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration Menu 22 SNMP Configuration SNMP Get Community public Set Community public Trusted Host 0 0 0 0 Trap Community public Destination 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 193 Chapter 23 SNMP Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The following table describes the SNMP configuration parameters Table 58 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration FIELD DESCRIPTION SNMP Get Community Type the Get Community which is the password for the incoming Get and GetNext requests from the management station Set Community Type the Set community which is the password for incoming Set requests from the management station Trusted Host If you enter a trusted host your Prestige will only respond to SNMP messages from this address A blank default field means your Prestige will respond to al
70. you can make visible to the outside world even though SUA makes your whole inside network appear as a single computer to the outside world You may enter a single port number or a range of port numbers to be forwarded and the local IP address of the desired server The port number identifies a service for example web service is on port 80 and FTP on port 21 In some cases such as for unknown services or where one server can support more than one service for example both FTP and web service it might be better to specify a range of port numbers You can allocate a server IP address that corresponds to a port or a range of ports Many residential broadband ISP accounts do not allow you to run any server processes such as a Web or FTP server from your location Your ISP may periodically check for servers and may suspend your account if it discovers any active services at your location If you are unsure refer to your ISP 7 3 1 Default Server IP Address In addition to the servers for specified services NAT supports a default server IP address A default server receives packets from ports that are not specified in this screen Note If you do not assign an IP address in Server Set 1 default server the Prestige discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup 7 3 2 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers The most often used port numbers are shown in the following table Pl
71. 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 162 NDF 3N 4 N 5N 6 N Enter Filter Rule Number 1 6 to Configure Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration 150 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 82 Menu 21 12 WebSet 12 Menu 21 12 Filter Rules Summary A Type Filter Rules Mmn 1 Y IP Pr 6 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 23 NDN 2 Y IP Pr 6 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 21 NDN 3 Y IP Pr 17 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 69 NDN A Y LP Pr 6 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 80 NDN 5N 6 N Enter Filter Rule Number 1 6 to Configure Note Do not edit filter sets 11 and 12 They are used D exclusively by the web configurator Any rules you configured in sets 11 and 12 will be erased and replaced when you apply the web configurator generated filter rules 18 5 Editing ATM Layer Options Follow the steps shown next to edit Menu 11 6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options In menu 11 1 move the cursor to the Edit ATM Options field and then press SPACE BAR to select Yes Press ENTER to display Menu 11 6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options There are two versions of menu 11 6 for the Prestige depending on whether you chose VC based LLC based multiplexing and PPP encapsulation in menu 11 1 18 5 1 VC based Multiplexing non PPP Encapsulation For VC based multiplexing by prior agreement a protocol is assigned a specific virtual circuit for example VC1 will carry IP Separate VPI and VCI numbers must be specified for
72. 0 1 2 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled Use the Prestige s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN Use the Prestige s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN 10 1 3 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes three hundred seconds The Prestige automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period The management session does not time out when a statistics screen is polling 10 2 Telnet You can configure your Prestige for remote Telnet access as shown next Figure 32 Telnet Configuration on a TCP IP Network Ei E VA m SS Internet L Ei m JJ L User telnets into E Incoming Traffic the LAN 10 3 FTP You can upload and download Prestige firmware and configuration files using FTP To use this feature your computer must have an FTP client 10 4 Web You can use the Prestige s embedded web configurator for configuration and file management See the online help for details 10 5 Configuring Remote Management Click Remote Management to open the following screen 91 Chapter 10 Remote Management Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 33 Remote Management Remote Management Control Server Type Access Status Port Secured Client IP m r E Telnet All e 0 0 00 ecl FTP All ei 0 0 0 0 Web All zo 0 0 0 0
73. 000 00000001 01000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 64 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 65 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 127 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 Table 92 Subnet 3 LAST OCTET BIT NETWORK NUMBER VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 190 192 168 1 191 Appendix C 264 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Example Eight Subnets Table 93 Subnet 4 NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 192 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 11000000 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 11000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 192 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 193 Broadcast Address 192 168 1 255 Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 Similarly use a 27 bit mask to create 8 subnets 001 010 011 100 101 110 The following table shows class C IP address last octet values for each subnet Table 94 Eight Subnets SUBNET SUBNET ADDRESS FIRST ADDRESS LAST ADDRESS ESS SE SEE 1 0 1 30 31 5 33 62 63 3 64 65 94 RE 7 m 97 126 127 5 128 129 158 159 6 160 161 190 191 7 192 193 222 223 8 224 223 254 255 The fo
74. 010004c0a866 40001 06b50ec0a8 66 40001f06ac12c0a8 66 Packet Trigger Protocol 1 14ca849a7b08004a5c020001006162636465666768696a6b6c Packet Trigger Protocol 1 14ca849a7b0427001700195b3e00000000600220008cd40000 Packet Trigger Protocol 1 14ca849a7b0427001700195b451d1430135004000077600000 SdemdSyslogSend SYSLOG FILLOG SYSLOG NOTICE String String IP Src xx xx xx xx Dst xx xx xx xx prot spo xxxx dpo xxxx S04 gt R0O1mD IP is the packet header and S04 gt ROlmD means filter set 4 S and rule 1 R match m drop D Src Source Address Dst Destination Address prot Protocol STCP UDP TEMPI spo Source port dpo Destination port Jul 19 14 43 55 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL IP Src 202 132 154 123 Dst 255 255 255 255 UDP spo 0208 dpo 0208 SO3 gt ROIlmF Jul 19 14 44 00 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL IP Src 192 168 102 20 Dst 202 132 154 1 UDP spo 05d4 dpo 0035 S03 gt RO1mF Jul 19 14 44 04 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL IP Src 192 168 102 20 Dst 202 132 154 1 UDP spo 05d4 dpo 0035 S03 gt RO1mF 4 PPP Log SdemdSyslogSend SYSLOG PPPLOG SYSLOG NOTICE String String ppp Proto Starting ppp Proto Opening ppp Proto Closing ppp Proto Shutdown Proto LCP ATCP BACP BCP CBCP CCP CHAP PAP IPCP IPXCP Jul 19 11 42 44 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL Jul 19 11 42 49 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL Jul 19 11 42 54 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL ppp LCP Closing ppp
75. 12 1 Route Name Type a descriptive name for this route This is for identification purpose only Active This field allows you to activate deactivate this static route Destination IP Address This parameter specifies the IP network address of the final destination Routing is always based on network number If you need to specify a route to a single host use a subnet mask of 255 255 255 255 in the subnet mask field to force the network number to be identical to the host ID IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask for this destination See the IP Address and Subnet Mask section in this manual Gateway IP Address Type the IP address ofthe gateway The gateway is a router or switch on the same network segment as the device s LAN or WAN port The gateway helps forward packets to their destinations Metric Metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Type a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Private This parameter determines if the Prestige will include the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts If set to Yes this route is kept private and is not included in RIP broadcasts If No the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadc
76. 128 and 192 168 1 128 with mask 255 255 255 128 ID bits borrowed to form network ID bits The number of borrowed host ID bits determines the number of subnets you can have The remaining number of host ID bits after borrowing determines the number of hosts you can have on each subnet gt gt Note In the following charts shaded bolded last octet bit values indicate host Table 88 Subnet 1 NETWORK NUMBER ee BIE IP Address 192 168 1 0 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 00000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 Subnet Address 192 168 1 0 Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 1 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 126 192 168 1 127 Table 89 Subnet 2 NETWORK NUMBER LAST OCTET BIT VALUE IP Address 192 168 1 128 IP Address Binary 11000000 10101000 00000001 10000000 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 128 Subnet Mask Binary 11111111 11111111 11111111 10000000 Subnet Address Lowest Host ID 192 168 1 129 192 168 1 128 Broadcast Address Highest Host ID 192 168 1 254 192 168 1 255 The remaining 7 bits determine the number of hosts each subnet can have Host IDs of all zeros represent the subnet itself and host IDs of all ones are the broadcast address for that subnet so the actual number of hosts available on each subnet in the example above is 20529 or 126 hosts for each
77. 2 SE KEANE an aaa dann DN KEN mann 119 Figure 60 Menu 23 Change Password nn 122 Figure 61 Menu 1 General SMR ee 125 Figure 62 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS eese eise than anne teta 126 Figure 63 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup cken ae 128 Figure 64 Menu 2 1 Trattie Redirect Setup nee 130 Figure 65 Menu 3 LED poco P 132 Figure 66 Menu 3 1 LAN Port Filter Setup arnsrarssaaenrssdeidrri nern rtl trea ttl nebenan 132 Figure 67 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup unnasssannesnanannnnnnnnannnnnnnn 133 Figure 68 IP Alias Merk EXSIIDIS eer rine ee boe nonni N 137 Figure 69 Menu 3 2 TCP P and DHEP Setup ann 137 Figure 70 Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias SEP a aaa aa ka ph ra 138 Figure 71 Menu 1 General Selup unse ei 139 Figure 72 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ae erdee det 140 Figure 73 Menu 11 Remote Node Setup are EGE a RESPIRARE UR PY qae Fu ndn 143 Figure 74 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile IKE ranae ea cota ne Eee ENES 144 Figure 75 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options nanne ennen 146 Figure 76 Sample IP Addresses for a TCP IP LAN to LAN Connection 148 Figure 77 Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter RFC 1483 or ENET Encapsulation 148 Figure 78 Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation 149 Figure 79 Internet SECU eT nenne Eee nadar ee 149 17 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 80 Menu Z1 Fler Set Configuration ae 150 Figure 31 M
78. 248 29 8192 14 255 255 255 252 30 16384 15 255 255 255 254 31 32768 1 Appendix C 266 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 267 Appendix C Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Appendix D PPPoE PPPoE in Action An ADSL modem bridges a PPP session over Ethernet PPP over Ethernet RFC 2516 from your computer to an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit which connects to a DSL Access Concentrator where the PPP session terminates see Figure 184 One PVC can support any number of PPP sessions from your LAN PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up services using PPP Benefits of PPPoE PPPoE offers the following benefits It provides you with a familiar dial up networking DUN user interface It lessens the burden on the carriers of provisioning virtual circuits all the way to the ISP on multiple switches for thousands of users For GSTN PSTN and ISDN the switching fabric is already in place It allows the ISP to use the existing dial up model to authenticate and optionally to provide differentiated services Traditional Dial up Scenario The following diagram depicts a typical hardware configuration where the computers use traditional dial up networking Appendix D 268 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 184 Single Computer per Router Hardware Configuration I ha 4 gt N K _
79. 255 255 10 132 50 3 M 1 4 10 132 50 3 Server 54 6 Ta 8 9 104 Action Edit Select Rule Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Now configure the IGA3 to map to our web server and mail server on the LAN 1 Enter 15 from the main menu 2 Enter 2 in Menu 15 NAT Setup 3 Enter 1 in Menu 15 2 NAT Server Sets to see the following menu Configure it as shown Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 174 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 112 Example 3 Menu 15 2 1 Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup Rule Start Port No End Port No IP Address L Default Default 0 0 0 0 2 80 80 192 168 1 21 3 25 25 192 168 1 20 4 0 0 020 20 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 Is 0 0 0000 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 Liss 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 21 5 4 Example 4 NAT Unfriendly Application Programs Some applications do not support NAT Mapping using TCP or UDP port address translation In this case it is better to use Many to Many No Overload mapping as port numbers do not change for Many to Many No Overload and One to One NAT mapping types The following figure illustrates this Figure 113 NAT Example 4 Mapping Rules A 192 1 68 1 33 A B C lt gt IGAs 1 2 3 Type Many toMany No Overload Er I LAN N B 192 168 1 34 J Internet S 31GAs Au N 10
80. 4 Advanced Applications 11 Remote Node Setup 1994 2004 ZyXEL Communications Corp Prestige 660RU T1 Main Menu Advanced Management 21 Filter Set Configuration 22 SNMP Configuration 23 System Password System Maintenance 25 IP Routing Policy Setup 26 Schedule Setup 12 Static Routing Setup 15 NAT Setup 99 Exit Enter Menu Selection Number 13 2 1 System Management Terminal Interface Summary Table 34 Main Menu Summary MENU TITLE DESCRIPTION General Setup Use this menu to set up your general information WAN Backup Setup Use this menu to setup traffic redirect LAN Setup Use this menu to set up your LAN connection Internet Access Setup A quick and easy way to set up an Internet connection s oln gt Remote Node Setup Use this menu to set up the Remote Node for LAN to LAN connection including Internet connection Static Routing Setup Use this menu to set up static routes 15 NAT Setup Use this menu to specify inside servers when NAT is enabled 21 Filter Set Configuration Use this menu to configure filters 22 SNMP Configuration Use this menu to set up SNMP related parameters 23 System Password Use this menu to change your password 24 System Maintenance This menu provides system status diagnostics software upload etc 25 IP Routing Policy Setup Use this menu to conf
81. 54 Diagnostic DSL Line Diagnostic DSL Line Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F W Reset ADSL Line Successfully Reset ADSL Line Upstream Noise Margin ATM Status Downstream Noise Margin ATM Loopback Test Back The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 30 Diagnostic DSL Line LABEL DESCRIPTION Reset ADSL Click this button to reinitialize the ADSL line The large text box above then displays Line the progress and results of this operation for example Start to reset ADSL Loading ADSL modem F W Reset ADSL Line Successfully ATM Status Click this button to view ATM status ATM Loopback Test Click this button to start the ATM loopback test Make sure you have configured at least one PVC with proper VPIs VCIs before you begin this test The Prestige sends an OAM F5 packet to the DSLAM ATM switch and then returns it loops it back to the Prestige The ATM loopback test is useful for troubleshooting problems with the DSLAM and ATM network Upstream Noise Margin Click this button to display the upstream noise margin Downstream Click this button to display the downstream noise margin Noise Margin Back Click this button to go back to the main Diagnostic screen 115 Chapter 12 Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 12 6 Firmware Screen Find firmware at www zyxel com in a file that usually uses the system model
82. 6 Menu 3 LAN Setup 134 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 135 Chapter 16 Menu 3 LAN Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 17 Internet Access This chapter shows you how to configure the LAN and WAN of your Prestige for Internet access 17 1 Internet Access Overview Refer to the chapters on the web configurator s wizard LAN and WAN screens for more background information on fields in the SMT screens covered in this chapter 17 2 IP Policies Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing IPPR provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator Policy based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis prior to the normal routing Create policies using SMT menu 25 see Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing and apply them on the Prestige LAN and or WAN interfaces using menus 3 2 LAN and 11 3 WAN 17 3 IP Alias IP alias allows you to partition a physical network into different logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network D Note Make sure that the subnets of the logical networks do not overlap The following figure shows a
83. 8 TEER TER BA mernere 192 168 1 65 9859 27171 UDP msraso 192 158 1 8 7 2B1 25037 UDF E mms 6323 E81 20 2810 20711 TCP Figure 43 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add Service Settings Description of service Test Name or IP address for example 192 168 0 12 of the computer hosting this service on pour network 192 168 1 11 External Port number for this service 143 TCP C UDP Internal Port number for this service 143 Cancel 5 When the UPnP enabled device is disconnected from your computer all port mappings will be deleted automatically 6 Select Show icon in notification area when connected option and click OK An icon displays in the system tray Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 102 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 44 System Tray Icon J Internet Connection is now connected X Click here for more information 3 Upnp2 Paint 7 Double click on the icon to display your current Internet connection status Figure 45 Internet Connection Status Internet Connection Status General Internet Gateway Status Connected Duration 00 00 56 Speed 100 0 Mbps Activity Internet Internet Gateway My Computer 9 v Packets Sent 8 B18 Received 5 943 746 Close Web Configurator Easy Access With UPnP you can access the web based configurator on the Prestige without finding out the IP address
84. 86 3 578 3942 www zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Corp www europe zyxel com 6 Innovation Road II WORLDWIDE Science Park sales zyxel com tw 886 3 578 2439 ftp zyxel com Hsinchu 300 ftp europe zyxel com Taiwan support zyxel com 1 800 255 4101 www us zyxel com ZyXEL Communications Inc NORTH 1 714 632 0882 1130 N Miller St AMERICA Anaheim sales zyxel com 1 714 632 0858 ftp us zyxel com CA 92806 2001 U S A support zyxel de 49 2405 6909 0 www zyxel de ZyXEL Deutschland GmbH Adenauerstr 20 A2 D 52146 GERMANY sales zyxel de 49 2405 6909 99 Wuerselen Germany info zyxel fr 33 0 4 72 52 97 97 www zyxel fr ZyXEL France FRANCE 33 0 4 72 52 19 20 eee 69760 Limonest France support zyxel es 34 902 195 420 www zyxel es ZyXEL Communications Alejandro Villegas 33 SPAIN sales zyxel es 34 913 005 345 1 28043 Madrid Spain support zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 00 www zyxel dk ZyXELCommunications A S Columbusvej 5 DENMARK sales zyxel dk 45 39 55 07 07 2860 Soeborg Denmark support zyxel no 47 22 80 61 80 www zyxel no ZyXELCommunications A S Nils Hansens vei 13 NORWAY sales zyxel no 47 22 80 61 81 0667 Oslo Norway support zyxel se 46 31 744 7700 www zyxel se ZyXEL Communications A S SWEDEN sales zyxel se 46 31 744 7701 I Mu support zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8411 www zyxel fi ZyXEL Communications Oy Malminkaari 10 FINLAND sales zyxel fi 358 9 4780 8448 00700 Helsinki Finland a is the prefix number you enter to make an
85. ALAN Te a 58 SAT Factory LAN DOFBtlis users nee vanen dat anne tennis 58 541 2 IP Address and Subnet Mask una aa 58 DAS RNP DOU reales 58 228 nie wr 59 EIE a TT DONT 59 DaT How Any IP WOKS senienas 60 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide ux Ormeau LAN sanieren 61 Chapter 6 VEN SER ea a T EEE a ee indeed ende 64 Gl SAND VERDI euren 64 CRI rennen 64 G2 PPPOE Eile WAREN aaa 65 OA ale SAN u 65 6 5 Zero Configuration Internet Auges anne 66 6 6 Configuring WAN Setup unse a Be ul 66 Of Tre REMEE 69 an Configuring WAN BSCKD snnt bep en 70 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens eee 74 C I NAT QUERIES eigen 74 FERE AS TCI SITIS 74 Z2 UNSERE DOES en are Sine EE hinde elementen SE ERI MOM Reed cid 75 7 1 3 How NAT WOmMS aan bur e UE E EU tourde 75 T NAT PHOUCSBO ee een ee 76 TA NAT Mapping TUB een 76 7 2 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT cesieeeeecesienee centies 77 F RE EVEN E OO EOS 78 7 31 DefaultServer IP Address ae 78 7 3 2 Port Forwarding Services and Port Numbers eneen neee nenne 78 7 3 3 Configuring Servers Behind SUA Example sss 79 7 4 Selecting Ihe NAT MODS T 79 TA OTT SUA SENE einen 80 7 8 Configuring Address Mapping nn 82 7 7 Editing an Address Mapping RUIG a 83 Chapter 8 Daae DNS SEND ae en eh 86 Bl ERSTE DP
86. Backup is highly recommended once your Prestige is functioning properly FTP is the preferred methods for backing up your current configuration to your computer since they are faster Any serial communications program should work fine however you must use Xmodem protocol to perform the download upload and you don t have to rename the files Please note that terms download and upload are relative to the computer Download means to transfer from the Prestige to the computer while upload means from your computer to the Prestige 25 2 1 Backup Configuration Follow the instructions as shown in the next screen 207 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 142 Telnet in Menu 24 5 Menu 24 5 System Maintenance Backup Configuration To transfer the configuration file to your workstation follow the procedure below 1 Launch the FTP client on your workstation 2 Type open and the IP address of your Prestige Then type root and SMT password as requested 3 Locate the rom 0 file 4 Type get rom 0 to back up the current Prestige configuration to your workstation For details on FTP commands please consult the documentation of your FTP client program For details on backup using TFTP note that you must remain in this menu to back up using TFTP please see your Prestige manual Press ENTER to Exit 25 2 2 U
87. C IF OR ENETORB uo ades a dde inb HD Epor Mp E E E UM D 260 IP eapcrrr A 260 E E E E E TEE E A E ecg E E E E E EA A E EA EN 260 Sunol MAENE coc i pov dot i din mam oan inel ntis Fus 261 ciui m 261 Example TBB een 262 Example Fout SUDetS eu 264 Ponpe Eig UP e ee 265 Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks eene 266 Appendix D PPPEE eee 268 dee ha ne E 268 BERNER PPPOE Era 268 Traditonal Dialup SOON ANG resetten taten 268 How PP PGE WAKE eriin a aaa 269 Presfige as a PPPOE Client Gee P 269 14 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Appendix E MRS REIN ES DA SET een 270 antennae ewes ROT DT DARSTELLT TERE TE ESSENS HINTEN ERT E E E 270 Appendix F Koammandinterpreter au ae 272 Pa MAGN WU DP 272 CMM ASN eg 272 Appendix G Es S log 2L METTI T RDS T 274 SL AET 280 15 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide List of Figures Figure 1 Prestige Internet Access Application eerie ennt nnn nnna 35 Figure 2 Prestige LAN to LAN Application Licinia catt epea tarta nena ebria rnn ME EEN oou ntt 36 Figure 3 Password SEIEN m 38 Figure d Change Password at LOGIN sneren Enn S R DENN NR RNN 39 Figures Web Configurator Site Map Screen aaa 40 Figure 6 Internet Access Wizard Setup First Screen cccccseecceeessseeeeeeeesneeeeeeeneeneeeee 44 Figure 7 Internet Connection with PP
88. Date amp Time DialAssist Energy Saver Extensions Manager File Exchange File Sharing General Controls Internet Keyboard Keychain Access Launcher Location Manager Memory Modem Monitors Mouse Multiple Users Numbers QuickTime Settings Remote Access Software Update Sound Speech Startup Disk Text USB Printer Sharing 2 Select Ethernet built in from the Connect via list Figure 181 Macintosh OS 8 9 TCP IP TCP IP Comect via Setup Configure DHCP Client ID IP Address Subnet mask Router address Marne server addr Using DHCP Server t lt will be supplied by server gt lt will be supplied by server gt lt will be supplied by server gt Search comans lt will be supplied by server gt 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP Server from the Configure list Appendix B 256 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box 5 Close the TCP IP Control Panel 6 Click Save if prompted to save changes to your configuration 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer if prompted Verifying Settings Check your TCP IP properties in the TCP
89. ELD DESCRIPTION Node Lnk This is the node index number and link type Link types are PPP ENET 1483 Status This shows the status of the remote node TxPkts The number of transmitted packets to this remote node RxPkts The number of received packets from this remote node Errors The number of error packets on this connection Tx B s This shows the transmission rate in bytes per second Rx B s This shows the receiving rate in bytes per second Up Time This is the time this channel has been connected to the current remote node My WAN IP from ISP This is the IP address of the ISP remote node Ethernet This shows statistics for the LAN Status This shows the current status of the LAN Tx Pkts This is the number of transmitted packets to the LAN Rx Pkts This is the number of received packets from the LAN Collision This is the number of collisions 197 Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 61 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status continued FIELD DESCRIPTION WAN This shows statistics for the WAN Line Status This shows the current status of the xDSL line which can be Up or Down Upstream This shows the upstream transfer rate in kbps Speed Downstream This shows the downstream transfer rate in kbps Speed CPU Load This specifies the percentage of CPU utilization 24 3 System Information To get to the
90. Guide Figure 125 Sample Telnet Filter User telnets into ENE Incoming Traffic Hie EAN 1 Enter 21 in the main menu to display Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration 2 Enter the index number of the filter set you want to configure in this case 6 3 Type a descriptive name or comment in the Edit Comments field for example TELNET WAN and press ENTER 4 Press ENTER atthe message Press ENTER to confirm or ESC to cancel toopen Menu 21 6 Filter Rules Summary 5 Type 1 to configure the first filter rule Make the entries in this menu as shown next When you press ENTER to confirm the following screen appears Note that there is only one filter rule in this set Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 188 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 126 Menu 21 6 1 Sample Filter Menu 21 6 1 TCP IP Filter Rule Filter 6 1 Filter Type TCP IP Filter Rule Active Yes IP Protocol 6 IP Source Route No Destination IP Addr 0 0 0 0 IP Mask 0 0 0 0 Port 23 Port Comp Equal Source IP Addr 0 0 0 0 IP Mask 0 0 0 0 Port Port Comp Equal ICP Estab No More No Log None Action Matched Drop Action Not Matched Forward Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Figure 127 Menu 21 6 1 Sample Filter Rules Summary Menu 21 1 6 Filter Rules Summary A Type Filter Rules Mmn 1 Y IP Pr 6 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 23 NDF 2 N 3N 4
91. Guide Figure 49 System Status System Status System Status System Name p660RU T1 ZyNOS FAN Version V3 40 ST 0 b1 10 22 2004 DSL FW Version DMT Fwer 3 0 8 A TC Hwer T14F7 0 0 Standard Multi Mode WAN Information IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 Default Gateway 0 0 0 0 VPIVCI 0 33 LAN Information MAC Address 00 a0 5 01 23 45 IP Address 192 158 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP Server DHCP Start IP 192 168 1 33 DHCP Pool Size 32 Show Statistics The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 25 System Status LABEL DESCRIPTION System Status System Name This is the name of your Prestige It is for identification purposes ZyNOS Firmware Version This is the ZyNOS firmware version and the date the firmware was created ZyNOS is ZyXEL s proprietary Network Operating System design DSL FW Version This is the DSL firmware version associated with your Prestige Standard This is the standard that your Prestige is using WAN Information IP Address This is the WAN port IP address 109 Chapter 12 Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 25 System Status continued LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Subnet Mask This is the WAN port IP subnet mask Default Gateway This is the IP address of the default gateway if applicable VPI VCI This is th
92. I nen en een 86 BAA DYNDNS Mil dead e 86 8 2 orn Dyname ONS seen 86 Chapter 9 Time and Dale aussi Lastacaatenstavartodesdai 88 9 1 Configuring Mine and Date a 88 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Chapter 10 Remote Management Configuration uunersesnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 90 10 1 Remote Management Overview nnee nenererensenerverve nennen anna 90 10 1 1 Remote Management Limitations aas sas enar sonareaciatamre aant anne tno tet 90 10 1 2 Remote Management and NAT nunsanansnser venenseenevenensensnvennnnnenne 91 12 2 SEM pete 91 10 2 Telnet ran ehe 91 IS UE water Bee 91 Le OE PE 91 10 5 Configuring Remote Management users rennen 91 Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPIPS ccsasisicesscntesearnsssvinsnasisiateisatiarssunssateasracescceendedransce 94 11 3 Introducing Universal Flag and Play 225 rrr tete rt abra beken 94 11 1 1 How do know ir Fm using UPAR ai naar pce 94 E NAT RES m 94 TIT S CUE W PMP en 94 MZ EDE aM a eh Bee Bst 95 LUE Ee uM eer 95 11 3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example 2 ccce eate sere rn 96 11 4 Using UPnP in Windows XP Example es ae 99 Chapter 12 Maintenange renneri 108 121 Maintenance OVS 4 drenge mdk 108 122 System SAUS SEER eier 108 1221 SEEN SEE TE ren ee er 110 12 9 DHCP Table SBE sun eier 111 122 Any IP Table SEEN au neh 112 125 Dooe SENS ee 113 12 5 1 Diag
93. IGA is the destination address on the WAN NAT maps private local IP addresses to globally unique ones required for communication with hosts on other networks It replaces the original IP source address and TCP or UDP source port numbers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload NAT mapping in each packet and then forwards it to the Internet The Prestige keeps track of the original addresses and port numbers so incoming reply packets can have their original values restored The following figure illustrates this 75 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 23 How NAT Works NAT Table LAN Inside Local Inside Global WAN IP Address IP Address 192 168 1 13 192 168 1 10 IGA1 EJ 192 168 1 11 IGA2 192 168 1 12 IGA3 192 168 1 13 IGA4 192 168 1 12 N m 192 189 1 10 Internet J Inside Local en Addresses ILA 192 168 1 10 Inside Global Addresses IGA 7 1 4 NAT Application The following figure illustrates a possible NAT application where three inside LANs logical LANs using IP Alias behind the Prestige can communicate with three distinct WAN networks More examples follow at the end of this chapter Figure 24 NAT Application With IP Alias LAN1 192 168 1 X Server in Network Server Admin Network Admin 192 168 1 1 IP 1 IGA 1 m E E D ens lt _ lt Corporation B gt mn NT Server b 192 168 1
94. IP Control Panel window Macintosh OS X 1 Click the Apple menu and click System Preferences to open the System Preferences window Figure 182 Macintosh OS X Apple Menu Grab File Edit Captu About This Mac Get Mac OS X Software System Preferences Dock gt Location gt 2 Click Network in the icon bar e Select Automatic from the Location list e Select Built in Ethernet from the Show list e Click the TCP IP tab 3 For dynamically assigned settings select Using DHCP from the Configure list 257 Appendix B Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 183 Macintosh OS X Network eo Network oO He a Show All Displays Network Startup Disk Location Automatic Show Built in Ethernet E Configure Using DHCP Domain Name Servers Optional IP Address 192 168 11 12 168 95 1 1 Provided by DHCP Server Subnet Mask 255 255 254 0 Router 192 168 10 11 Search Domains Optional DHCP Client ID Optional Example apple com earthlink net Ethernet Address 00 05 02 43 93 ff Click the lock to prevent further changes Appty Now 4 For statically assigned settings do the following From the Configure box select Manually Type your IP address in the IP Address box Type your subnet mask in the Subnet mask box Type the IP address of your Prestige in the Router address box 5 Click Apply Now and close the window 6 Turn on your Prestige and
95. IPCP Closing ppp CCP Closing 24 5 Diagnostic The diagnostic facility allows you to test the different aspects of your Prestige to determine if it is working properly Menu 24 4 allows you to choose among various types of diagnostic tests to evaluate your system as shown in the following figure Follow the procedure next to get to Diagnostic 1 From the main menu type 24 to open Menu 24 System Maintenance 2 From this menu type 4 Diagnostic to open Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic 203 Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 141 Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic xDSL System 1 Reset xDSL 21 Reboot System 22 Command Mode TCP IP 12 Ping Host Enter Menu Selection Number Host IP Address N A The following table describes the diagnostic tests available in menu 24 4 for and the connections Table 64 Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Menu Diagnostic FIELD DESCRIPTION Reset xDSL Re initialize the xDSL link to the telephone company Ping Host Ping the host to see if the links and TCP IP protocol on both systems are working Reboot System Reboot the Prestige Command Mode Type the mode to test and diagnose your Prestige using specified commands Host IP Address If you typed 12 to Ping Host now type the address of the computer you want to ping
96. L2TP EE Access Concentrator SP 2 How PPPoE Works The PPPoE driver makes the Ethernet appear as a serial link to the computer and the computer runs PPP over it while the modem bridges the Ethernet frames to the Access Concentrator AC Between the AC and an ISP the AC is acting as a L2TP Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol LAC L2TP Access Concentrator and tunnels the PPP frames to the ISP The L2TP tunnel is capable of carrying multiple PPP sessions With PPPoE the VC Virtual Circuit is equivalent to the dial up connection and is between the modem and the AC as opposed to all the way to the ISP However the PPP negotiation is between the computer and the ISP Prestige as a PPPoE Client When using the Prestige as a PPPoE client the computers on the LAN see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPoE This alleviates the administrator from having to manage the PPPoE clients on the individual computers Figure 185 Prestige as a PPPoE Client nume EE Ethernet Ethernet ADSL Access l ISP Concentrator er 269 Appendix D Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Appendix E Virtual Circuit Topology ATM is a connection oriented technology meaning that it sets up virtual circuits over which end systems communicate The terminology for virtual circuits is as follows Virtual Channel Logical connections between ATM switches Virtual Path A bundle of virtual channels Virtual CircuitA series of virtual paths
97. LAN divided into subnets A B and C Chapter 17 Internet Access 136 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 68 IP Alias Network Example A 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 24 Menu 3 2 Ethernet B 192 168 2 1 192 168 2 24 Menu 3 2 1 Interface pe EL C 192 168 3 1 192 168 3 24 Menu 3 2 1 Use menu 3 2 1 to configure IP Alias on your Prestige 17 4 IP Alias Setup Use menu 3 2 to configure the first network Move the cursor to Edit IP Alias field and press SPACEBAR to choose Yes and press ENTER to configure the second and third network Figure 69 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup DHCP Setup DHCP Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 Size of Client IP Pool 32 Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server N A TCP IP Setup IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 RIP Direction None Version RIP 2B Multicast None IP Policies Edit IP Alias Yes Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Pressing ENTER displays Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup as shown next 137 Chapter 17 Internet Access Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 70 Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup IP Alias 1 Yes IP Address 192 168 2 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 RIP Direction None Version RIP 1 Incoming protocol filters Outgoing protocol filter
98. MP traffic is blocked from the WAN Ping traffic is blocked from the WAN Apply Cancel Once you apply the filter rules im the web configurator filter sets 11 and 12 are automatically applied in the protocol filters field under Input Filter Sets in SMT menu 11 5 previously applied are erased after you apply the Internet Security filter rules in the web configurator To reapply them or apply new filter sets you need to enter the filter set numbers again along with filter sets 11 and 12 For example to apply filter sets 1 and 2 you enter 1 2 11 12 D Note SMT input protocol filter set numbers that were 149 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 18 4 2 Web Configurator Filter Sets When you apply filter rules using the web configurator filter sets 11 and 12 are automatically generated in SMT menu 21 This feature is not available on all models Figure 80 Menu 21 Filer Set Configuration Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration Filter Filter Set Comments Set f Comments 1 7 2 NetBIOS_WAN 8 3 NetBIOS LAN 9 4 10 5 gel WebSetl 6 12 WebSet2 Enter Filter Set Number to Configure 0 The following figures display the filter rules in filter sets 11 and 12 Figure 81 Menu 21 11 WebSet 11 Menu 21 11 Filter Rules Summary A Type Filter Rules Mmn 1 Y IP Pr 17 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 161 NDN 2 Y IP Pr 17 SA 0
99. N Check Mechanism Press SPACE BAR and then press ENTER to select the method that the Prestige uses to check the DSL connection Select DSL Link to have the Prestige check the DSL connection s physical layer Select ICMP to have the Prestige periodically ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address fields Check WAN IP Configure this field to test your Prestige s WAN accessibility Type the IP Address1 3 address of a reliable nearby computer for example your ISP s DNS server address When using a WAN backup connection the Prestige periodically pings the addresses configured here and uses the other WAN backup connection if configured if there is no response KeepAlive Fail Type the number of times 2 recommended that your Prestige may ping the IP Tolerance addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address field without getting a response before switching to a WAN backup connection or a different WAN backup connection Recovery Interval sec When the Prestige is using a lower priority connection usually a WAN backup connection it periodically checks to whether or not it can use a higher priority connection Type the number of seconds 30 recommended for the Prestige to wait between checks Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic ICMP Timeout Type the number of seconds for an ICMP session to wait for the ICMP response Traffic Redirect Press
100. N Telnet Server Each of these read only labels denotes a service or protocol FTP Server Web Server Port This field shows the port number for the service or protocol You may change the port number if needed but you must use the same port number to access the Prestige Access Select the access interface if any by pressing the SPACE BAR Choices are LAN only WAN only All or Disable The default is LAN only Secured Client IP The default 0 0 0 0 allows any client to use this service or protocol to access the Prestige Enter an IP address to restrict access to a client with a matching IP address When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 27 2 2 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when A filter in menu 3 1 LAN or in menu 11 5 WAN is applied to block a Telnet FTP or Web service You have disabled that service in menu 24 11 The IP address in the Secured Client IP field menu 24 11 does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Prestige will disconnect the session immediately There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running You may only have one remote management session running at one time 225 Chapter 27 Remote Management Presti
101. N 5N 6 N Enter Filter Rule Number 1 6 to Configure 1 This shows you that you have configured and activated A Y a TCP IP filter rule Type IP Pr 6 for destination telnet ports DP 23 M N means an action can be taken immediately The action is to drop the packet m D if the action is matched and to forward the packet immediately n F if the action is not matched no matter whether there are more rules to be checked there aren t in this example After you have created the filter set you must apply it 1 Enter 11 in the main menu to display menu 11 and type the remote node number to edit 2 Go to the Edit Filter Sets field press SPACE BAR to choose Yes and press ENTER 3 This brings you to menu 11 5 Apply the example filter set for example filter set 3 in this menu as shown in the next section 189 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 22 7 Applying Filters and Factory Defaults This section shows you where to apply the filter s after you design it them Sets of factory default filter rules have been configured in menu 21 but have not been applied to filter traffic Table 57 Filter Sets Table FILTER SETS DESCRIPTION Input Filter Sets earlier in this chapter for information on filters Apply filters for incoming traffic You may apply protocol or device filter rules See Output Filter Sets Apply filters for traf
102. No IP Address L Default Default 0 00 20 2 21 2 192 168 1 33 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 Fis 0 0 00 50 50 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ux 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 Or 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 I 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 4 Enter a port number in an unused Start Port No field To forward only one port enter it again in the End Port No field To specify a range of ports enter the last port to be forwarded in the End Port No field 5 Enter the inside IP address of the server in the IP Address field In the following figure you have a computer acting as an FTP Telnet and SMTP server ports 21 23 and 25 at 192 168 1 33 6 Press ENTER at the Press ENTER to confirm prompt to save your configuration after you define all the servers or press ESC at any time to cancel 169 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 103 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example L FTP Telnet SMTP Server E 192 168 1 1 192 168 1 33 um IN c Internet IP address assigned by ISP 21 5 General NAT Examples The following are some examples of NAT configuration 21 5 1 Example 1 Internet Access Only In the following Internet access example you only need one rule where your ILAs Inside Local addresses all map to one dynamic IGA Inside Global Address assigned by your ISP
103. P Serien 42 1 12 PPP aver Etlel ligo sn oie edn ea 42 8 713 PPPOR eed Be 42 3 1 14 PFE FEB nee 43 SARAT e 43 3 1 2 1 VO based Multiplexing nenne a d pto dra EE Ka ata aaa 43 ENECPAIBERSGCC HE eripe 43 LS VELA VOL se 43 3 1 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup First Screen sss 43 32 IP Address and Subnet Mask aan una ae ae 44 3 2 1 IF Address Asien eu 45 3 2 1 1 IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation 45 3 2 1 2 IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation 45 3 2 1 3 IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation 45 3 2 1 4 Private P Addresses auch 46 3 2 2 Nailed Up Connection PPP use 46 ad ATE upset se peii RES SEU UU REC PR RAPERE BER DUE EE A ARE FAI RENSES RENESTE DIE sene BEFERE F RUM 46 3 2 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup Second Screen seen 46 DIS DHCP Zefa sa 50 SZ TE POS SOP scele sus tuia ERN CEU MU ripa i Re bui fae EH ERA 50 3 2 6 Internet Access Wizard Setup Third Screen ss 50 3 2 7 Internet Access Wizard Setup Connection Test een 53 3 2 7 1 Test Your Internet Canneeclen aka 53 Chapter 4 Password BUN serien 54 4 1 Password VETO een 54 4 11 Comigumg Faso a 54 Chapter 5 LAN Setipinna aa A 56 S TLAN OVGA ON een 56 5 1 1 LANs MANS and the Prestige an en 56 ee DNS Sener Address aka 57 5 3 DNS Server Address ASS QNM N san 57 D
104. P table 112 applicaions Internet access 35 AT command 207 ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 42 ATM layer options 151 Authentication 145 Authentication protocol 145 auto Crossover 32 auto negotiation 32 B Backup 207 Backup Typ 71 Bridging 145 158 Ether Address 160 Ethernet 158 Ethernet Addr Timeout 160 Remote Node 158 Static Route Setup 160 bridging 125 Budget Management 219 C Call filtering 178 Index Call filters Built in 178 User defined 178 Call Scheduling 238 Maximum Number of Schedule Sets 238 PPPoE 240 Precedence 238 Precedence Example 238 CBR Continuous Bit Rate 68 CDR 202 CDR Call Detail Record 201 change password at login 39 Collision 197 Command Interpreter Mode 218 Community 193 compact 35 compact guide 38 Computer Name 124 Conditions that prevent TFTP and FTP from working over WAN 209 Configuration 50 111 configuration file 206 console session 245 Cost Of Transmission 147 156 Country Code 199 CPU Load 198 Customer Support 5 D Data Filtering 178 default LAN IP address 38 default user name and password 38 Device Filter rules 187 Device rule 187 DHCP 33 50 58 86 111 134 199 DHCP client 33 DHCP relay 33 DHCP server 33 111 134 DHCP table 111 diagnostic 113 280 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Diagnostic Tools 196 Filter Rule Setup 182 DNS 134 Filter Set Domain Name 57 79 Class 182 domain name 124 Filtering 178 182 Domain Name
105. POE iacens etit ande aa nm ana dann ern 47 Figure 8 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 one 48 Figure 9 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP ea 48 Figure 10 Internet Connection with PPPOA can 49 Figure 11 Internet Access Wizard Setup Third Screen nnn onsen enneeeren nennen 51 Figure 12 Internet Access Wizard Setup LAN Configuration nennen enen 52 Figure 13 Internet Access Wizard Setup Connection Tests nnen eneen 53 FEINE T4 PRINT 54 Figure 15 LAN and WAN IP Addresses a na LEN 56 Fa te Any FEST eek en 60 mU Ard N Se eek 61 Figure 18 Example of Traffic Shapiro ED se Ebbe 66 Figure 19 WAN Setup PPPOE aus aa ERNE EAE kan rein ae 67 Figure 20 Tramo Redirect Bates 70 Figure 21 Traffic Redirect LAN Se ai dan hed 70 Figure 22 WAN BackUp ran ren een a 71 Figure 23 How NAT WORKS oa DE be LE bekende 76 Figure 24 NAT Application With IP Alias once a 76 Figure 25 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example unsure en onnennnnenseenreereen eneen 79 Figure 26 NAT Mode scannen a EDEL 80 Figure 27 Edit SUAINAT Server Set nnd 81 Figure 28 Address Mapping Rules aan ERNE REGERE 82 Figure 29 Address Mapping Rule Edit una 83 Flere U Dynami DNS EE 87 Figure ST Tine and Date m 88 Figure 32 Telnet Configuration on a TCP IP Network eee 91 Figure 33 Remote Management ae 92 Figure 34 Configuring UPMP m caironar eoi AE SE 95 Figure 35 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication 96 Figure 36 Add Remove Programs Windo
106. Prestige 660RU Tx Series ADSL2 Ethernet USB Gateway User s Guide YA Networking Power Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Copyright Copyright O 2005 by ZyXEL Communications Corporation The contents of this publication may not be reproduced in any part or as a whole transcribed stored in a retrieval system translated into any language or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic optical chemical photocopying manual or otherwise without the prior written permission of ZyXEL Communications Corporation Published by ZyXEL Communications Corporation All rights reserved Disclaimer ZyXEL does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any products or software described herein Neither does it convey any license under its patent rights nor the patent rights of others ZyXEL further reserves the right to make changes in any products described herein without notice This publication is subject to change without notice Trademarks ZyNOS ZYXEL Network Operating System is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Inc Other trademarks mentioned in this publication are used for identification purposes only and may be properties of their respective owners Copyright 2 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules Operation is subject to the fo
107. Prestige Hardware Installation and Connection Refer to the Quick Start Guide for information on hardware installation and connection 1 1 4 Front Panel LEDs The following table describes the LEDs on the front panel Table 2 Front Panel LED Description LED COLOR STATUS DESCRIPTION PWR SYS Green On The Prestige is receiving power and functioning properly Blinking The Prestige is rebooting Off The Prestige is not ready or has malfunctioned Red On The power to the Prestige is too low 10 100M Green On The Prestige has a successful 10Mbps Ethernet connection Blinking The Prestige is receiving or sending data Amber On The Prestige has a successful 100Mbps Ethernet connection Blinking The Prestige is receiving or sending data Off The LAN is not connected DSL Green On The Prestige is linked successfully to a DSLAM Blinking The Prestige is initializing the DSL line Slow Blinking The Prestige is sending or receiving non PPP traffic Fast Off The DSL link is down PPP Amber On The Prestige has a PPP PPPoA or PPPoE connection Blinking The Prestige is sending or receiving PPPoA or PPPoE traffic Off The Prestige does not have a PPP PPPoA or PPPoE connection USB Green On The Prestige has an USB connection Blinking The Prestige is sending or receiving data via the USB port Off The Prestige does not have an USB connection Chapter 1 Getting To Know
108. Prestige and log in Because TFTP does not have any security checks the Prestige records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address 2 Put the SMT in command interpreter CI mode by entering 8 in Menu 24 System Maintenance 3 Enter command sys stdio 0 to disable the SMT timeout so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted Enter command sys stdio 5 to restore the five minute SMT timeout default when the file transfer is complete 4 Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the Prestige Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer 5 Use the TFTP client see the example below to transfer files between the Prestige and the computer The file name for the configuration file is rom 0 rom zero not capital o Note that the telnet connection must be active and the SMT in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer For details on TFTP commands see following example please consult the documentation of your TFTP client program For UNIX use get to transfer from the Prestige to the computer and binary to set binary transfer mode 25 2 7 TFTP Command Example The following is an example TFTP command tftp i host get rom 0 config rom where i specifies binary image transfer mode use this mode when transferring binary files host is the Prestige IP address get transfers the file source on the Prestige rom 0 name
109. R to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 72 Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy FIELD DESCRIPTION Policy Set Name This is the policy set name assigned in Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup Active Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes to activate or No to deactivate the policy Inactive policies are displayed with a minus sign in SMT menu 25 Criteria IP Protocol IP layer 4 protocol for example UDP TCP ICMP etc Type of Service Prioritize incoming network traffic by choosing from Don t Care Normal Min Delay Max Thruput Min Cost or Max Reliable Precedence Precedence value of the incoming packet Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select a value from 0 to 7 or Don t Care Packet Length Type the length of incoming packets in bytes The operators in the Len Comp next field apply to packets of this length Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to choose from Equal Not Equal Less Greater Less or Equal or Greater or Equal Len Comp Source addr start end Source IP address range from start to end port start end Source port number range from start to end applicable only for TCP UDP Destination addr start end Destination IP address range from start to end port start end Destination port number range from start to end applicable only for TCP UDP Actio
110. SPACE BAR to select Yes or No Select Yes and press ENTER to configure Menu 2 1 Traffic Redirect Setup Select No default if you do not want to configure this feature When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 15 2 1 Traffic Redirect Setup Configure parameters that determine when the Prestige will forward WAN traffic to the backup gateway using Menu 2 1 Traffic Redirect Setup 129 Chapter 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 64 Menu 2 1Traffic Redirect Setup Menu 2 1 Traffic Redirect Setup Active No Configuration Backup Gateway IP Address 0 0 0 0 Metric 15 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 38 Menu 2 1Traffic Redirect Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Active Press SPACE BAR and select Yes to enable or No to disable traffic redirect setup The default is No Configuration Backup Gateway Enter the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation IP Address The Prestige automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the Prestige s Internet connection terminates Metric This field sets this route s priority among the routes the Prestige uses The metric represents the cost of
111. Table 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup First Screen LABEL DESCRIPTION Mode From the Mode drop down list box select Routing default if your ISP allows multiple computers to share an Internet account Otherwise select Bridge Encapsulation Select the encapsulation type your ISP uses from the Encapsulation drop down list box Choices vary depending on what you select in the Mode field If you select Bridge in the Mode field select either PPPoA or RFC 1483 If you select Routing in the Mode field select PPPoA RFC 1483 ENET ENCAP or PPPoE Multiplex Select the multiplexing method used by your ISP from the Multiplex drop down list box either VC based or LLC based Virtual Circuit VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit ID Refer to the appendix for more information VPI Enter the VPI assigned to you This field may already be configured VCI Enter the VCI assigned to you This field may already be configured Next Click this button to go to the next wizard screen The next wizard screen you see depends on what protocol you chose above Click on the protocol link to see the next wizard screen for that protocol 3 2 IP Address and Subnet Mask Similar to the way houses on a street share a common street name so too do computers on a LAN share one common network number Where you obtain your network number depends on your particular situation
112. Version Refers to the ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System system firmware version ZyNOS is a registered trademark of ZyXEL Communications Corporation ADSL Chipset Displays the vendor of the ADSL chipset and DSL version Vendor Standard This refers to the operational protocol the Prestige and the DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer are using LAN Ethernet Address Refers to the Ethernet MAC Media Access Control of your Prestige IP Address This is the IP address of the Prestige in dotted decimal notation IP Mask This shows the subnet mask of the Prestige DHCP This field shows the DHCP setting None Relay or Server ofthe Prestige 24 3 2 Console Port Speed You can set up different port speeds for the console port through Menu 24 2 2 System Maintenance Console Port Speed Your Prestige supports 9600 default 19200 38400 57600 and 115200 bps Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the desired speed in menu 24 2 2 as shown in the following figure 199 Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 136 Menu 24 2 2 System Maintenance Change Console Port Speed Menu 24 2 2 System Maintenanc Change Console Port Speed Console Port Speed 9600 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 24 4 Log and Trace There are two logging facilities in the Prestige The first is the error
113. Your Prestige 36 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 37 Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 2 Introducing the Web Configurator This chapter describes how to access and navigate the web configurator 2 1 Web Configurator Overview The web configurator is an HTML based management interface that allows easy Prestige setup and management via Internet browser Use Internet Explorer 6 0 and later or Netscape Navigator 7 0 and later versions with JavaScript enabled Recommended screen resolution is 1024 by 768 pixels 2 1 1 Accessing the Prestige Web Configurator 1 Make sure your Prestige hardware is properly connected refer to the Quick Start Guide 2 Prepare your computer computer network to connect to the Prestige refer to Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address on page 248 3 Launch your web browser 4 Type 192 168 1 1 as the URL 5 An Enter Network Password window displays Enter the password 1234 is the default Click Login to proceed to a screen asking you to change your password Click Cancel to revert to the default password in the password field Figure 3 Password Screen Prestige 660RU T1 Enter Password and click Login Password gm Cancel Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 38 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 6 It is highly recommended you change the default password Enter a new password
114. a single port For incoming packets your Prestige applies data filters only Packets are processed depending on whether a match is found The following sections describe how to configure filter sets 22 1 1 The Filter Structure of the Prestige A filter set consists of one or more filter rules Usually you would group related rules for example all the rules for NetBIOS into a single set and give it a descriptive name You can configure up to twelve filter sets with six rules in each set for a total of 72 filter rules in the system 179 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 22 2 Configuring a Filter Set for the Prestige To configure a filter set follow the steps shown next 1 Enter 21 in the main menu to display Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration as shown next Figure 118 Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration Filter Filter Set Comments Set Comments 1 y 2 NetBIOS WAN 8 3 NetBIOS_LAN 9 4 10 5 11 WebSetl 6 12 WebSet2 Enter Filter Set Number to Configure 0 Edit Comments N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 2 Type the filter set to configure no 1 to 12 and press ENTER 3 Type a descriptive name or comment in the Edit Comments field and press ENTER 4 Press ENTER at the message Press ENTER to confirm to display Menu 21 1 Filter Rules Summary that is if you sel
115. accepted in this field The Prestige has a prepackaged filter set NetBIOS WAN that blocks NetBIOS packets Include this in the call filter sets if you want to prevent NetBIOS packets from triggering calls to a remote node Figure 77 Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter RFC 1483 or ENET Encapsulation Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Input Filter Sets protocol filters 1 5 9 12 device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration 148 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 78 Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Input Filter Sets protocol filters 1 5 9 12 device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Call Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL 18 4 1 Web Configurator Internet Security Filter Rules In the web configurator open the Security screen as shown next Select the predefined filter rules and click Apply Figure 79 Internet Security Internet Security Your device provides the following filter rules Z Telnet Teinettraffic is blocked from the WAN to the LAN FTP traffic is blocked from the WAN to the LAN l TFTP traffic is blocked from the WAN to the LAN Web traffic is blocked from the WAN to the LAN SN
116. ae 208 Foue 142 FIP Session Example sne HIR bo PEDI Et LIB nfi tutt tobe d baa Pr X UE o DU 209 Figure 144 Telnet inte Monu 24 0 e 212 Figure 145 Restore Using FTP Session Example eeeeeeeesceseeeeee ners nennnnnndennn 212 Figure 146 Telnet Into Menu 24 7 1 Upload System Firmware nnn ennen vennen 213 Figure 147 Telnet Into Menu 24 7 2 System Maintenance sse 214 Figure 148 FTP Session Example of Firmware File Upload nennen 215 Figure 149 Command Mode in Menu 24 scccissssssecauu anna reet ana dann aaa recente 218 Figure 150 Valid COBRE een 218 Figure 151 Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control nennen vennen 219 Figure 152 Menu 24 9 1 System Maintenance Budget Management 219 Figure 153 Menu 24 System Maintenance cccc cesses seeeeceeeeseseceeeeseseeceeeeeeseeseneensnee 220 Figure 154 Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting 221 Figure 155 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control esee 225 Figure 156 Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup rror cierran rk treated KK KE ce 229 Figure 157 Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup iscritte Ee river 230 Figure 159 Mang 25 1 1 IP Routing Pl ae 231 Figure 159 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup namen 233 Figure 160 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options nennen eneen 233 Figure 161 Example of IP Policy BOU acera eser ert
117. already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9 In the set summary screen the new rule will be rule 7 not 9 Now if you delete rule 4 rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule so as old rule 5 becomes rule 4 old rule 6 becomes rule 5 and old rule 7 becomes rule 6 Table 51 Menu 15 1 1 First Set FIELD DESCRIPTION Set Name Enter a name for this set of rules This is a required field If this field is left blank the entire set will be deleted Action The default is Edit Edit means you want to edit a selected rule see following field Insert Before means to insert a rule before the rule selected The rules after the selected rule will then be moved down by one rule Delete means to delete the selected rule and then all the rules after the selected one will be advanced one rule None disables the Select Rule item Select Rule When you choose Edit Insert Before or Delete in the previous field the cursor jumps to this field to allow you to select the rule to apply the action in question Note You must press ENTER at the bottom of the screen to E save the whole set You must do this again if you make any changes to the set including deleting a rule No changes to the set take place until this action is taken Selecting Edit in the Action field and then selecting a rule brings up the following menu Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule in which you can edit an in
118. amic IP addresses or static IP addresses in the same subnet as the Prestige s LAN IP address can connect to the Prestige or access the Internet through the Prestige Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 5 LAN Setup 62 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 63 Chapter 5 LAN Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 6 WAN Setup This chapter describes how to configure WAN settings 6 1 WAN Overview A WAN Wide Area Network is an outside connection to another network or the Internet See Chapter 3 Wizard Setup for more information on the fields in the WAN screens 6 2 Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost The metric sets the priority for the Prestige s routes to the Internet If any two of the default routes have the same metric the Prestige uses the following pre defined priorities Normal route designated by the ISP see the Zero Configuration Internet Access section Traffic redirect route see the Traffic Redirect section WAN backup r
119. and instructions on getting started Web Configurator Online Help Embedded web help for descriptions of individual screens and supplementary information ZyXEL Glossary and Web Site Please refer to www zyxel com for an online glossary of networking terms and additional support documentation User Guide Feedback Help us help you E mail all User Guide related comments questions or suggestions for improvement to techwriters zyxel com tw or send regular mail to The Technical Writing Team ZyXEL Communications Corp 6 Innovation Road II Science Based Industrial Park Hsinchu 300 Taiwan Thank you Graphics Icons Key Prestige Computer Notebook computer N ie Server DSLAM Telephone Router Switch 27 Preface Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Introduction to DSL DSL Digital Subscriber Line technology enhances the data capacity of the existing twisted pair wire that runs between the local telephone company switching offices and most homes and offices While the wire itself can handle higher frequencies the telephone switching equipment is designed to cut off signals above 4 000 Hz to filter noise off the voice line but now everybody is searching for ways to get more bandwidth to improve access to the Web hence DSL technologies There are actually seven types of DSL service ranging in speeds from 16 Kbits sec to 52 Mbits sec The services are either symme
120. annel ID For example board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 3 C01 Outgoing Call dev 6 ch 0 Means the router has dialed to the PPPoE server 3 times dev x ch x SS 275 Appendix G Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 101 CDR Logs continued LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION board d line d channel d The PPPOE PPTP or dial up call is connected call d s C02 OutCall Connected d s board d line d channel d The PPPoE PPTP or dial up call was disconnected call d s CO2 Call Terminated Table 102 PPP Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION ppp LCP Starting The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage has started ppp LCP Opening The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage is opening ppp CHAP Opening The PPP connection s Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol stage is opening ppp IPCP Starting The PPP connection s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is starting ppp IPCP Opening The PPP connection s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is opening ppp LCP Closing The PPP connection s Link Control Protocol stage is closing ppp IPCP Closing The PPP connection s Internet Protocol Control Protocol stage is closing Table 103 ICMP Notes TYPE CODE DESCRIPTION 0 Echo Reply 0 Echo reply message 3 Destination Unreachable 0 Net unreachable 1 Host unreachable 2 Protocol unreachable 3 Port u
121. are brackets The symbol means or For example sys filter netbios config type on off means that you must specify the type of netbios filter and whether to turn it on or off Command Usage A list of valid commands can be found by typing help or at the command prompt Always type the full command Type exit to return to the SMT main menu when finished Appendix F 272 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 273 Appendix F Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Appendix G Log Descriptions This appendix provides descriptions of example log messages Table 97 System Maintenance Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION Time calibration is successful The router has adjusted its time based on information from the time server Time calibration failed The router failed to get information from the time server WAN interface gets IP s A WAN interface got a new IP address from the DHCP PPPOE PPTP or dial up server DHCP client IP expired A DHCP client s IP address has expired DHCP server assigns s The DHCP server assigned an IP address to a client Successful SMT login Someone has logged on to the router s SMT interface SMT login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router s SMT interface Successful WEB login Someone has logged on to the router s web configurator interface WEB login failed Someone has failed to log on to th
122. ast 1 sender everybody on the network Multicast delivers IP packets to a group of hosts on the network not everybody and not just 1 IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group it is not used to carry user data IGMP version 2 RFC 2236 is an improvement over version RFC 1112 but IGMP version 1 is still in wide use If you would like to read more detailed information about interoperability between IGMP version 2 and version 1 please see sections 4 and 5 of RFC 2236 The class D IP address is used to identify host groups and can be in the range 224 0 0 0 to 239 255 255 255 The address 224 0 0 0 is not assigned to any group and is used by IP multicast computers The address 224 0 0 1 is used for query messages and is assigned to the permanent group of all IP hosts including gateways All hosts must join the 224 0 0 1 group in order to participate in IGMP The address 224 0 0 2 is assigned to the multicast routers group The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP version 2 IGMP v2 At start up the Prestige queries all directly connected networks to gather group membership After that the Prestige periodically updates this information IP multicasting can be enabled disabled on the Prestige LAN and or WAN interfaces in the web configurator LAN WAN Select None to disable IP multicasting on these interfaces 5 5 Any IP Traditionally you
123. asts When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 19 Static Route Setup 156 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 157 Chapter 19 Static Route Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 20 Bridging Setup This chapter shows you how to configure the bridging parameters of your Prestige 20 1 Bridging in General Bridging bases the forwarding decision on the MAC Media Access Control or hardware address while routing does it on the network layer IP address Bridging allows the Prestige to transport packets of network layer protocols that it does not route for example SNA from one network to another The caveat is that compared to routing bridging generates more traffic for the same network layer protocol and it also demands more CPU cycles and memory For efficiency reasons do not turn on bridging unless you need to support protocols other than IP on your network For IP enable the routing if you need it do not bridge what the Prestige can route 20 2 Bridge Ethernet Setup Basically all non local packets are bridged to the WAN Your Prestige does not support IPX 20 2 1 Remote Node Bridging Setup Follow the procedure in another section to configure the protocol independent parameters in Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile For
124. at NAT Does In the simplest form NAT changes the source IP address in a packet received from a subscriber the inside local address to another the inside global address before forwarding the packet to the WAN side When the response comes back NAT translates the destination address the inside global address back to the inside local address before forwarding it to the original inside host Note that the IP address either local or global of an outside host is never changed The global IP addresses for the inside hosts can be either static or dynamically assigned by the ISP In addition you can designate servers for example a web server and a telnet server on your local network and make them accessible to the outside world If you do not define any servers for Many to One and Many to Many Overload mapping see Table 15 NAT offers the additional benefit of firewall protection With no servers defined your Prestige filters out all incoming inquiries thus preventing intruders from probing your network For more information on IP address translation refer to RFC 1631 The IP Network Address Translator NAT 7 1 3 How NAT Works Each packet has two addresses a source address and a destination address For outgoing packets the ILA Inside Local Address is the source address on the LAN and the IGA Inside Global Address is the source address on the WAN For incoming packets the ILA is the destination address on the LAN and the
125. between circuit end points Figure 186 Virtual Circuit Topology virtual circuit Think of a virtual path as a cable that contains a bundle of wires The cable connects two points and wires within the cable provide individual circuits between the two points In an ATM cell header a VPI Virtual Path Identifier identifies a link formed by a virtual path a VCI Virtual Channel Identifier identifies a channel within a virtual path The VPI and VCI identify a virtual path that is termination points between ATM switches A series of virtual paths make up a virtual circuit Your ISP Internet Service Provider should supply you with VPI VCI numbers Appendix E 270 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 271 Appendix E Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Appendix F Command Interpreter The following describes how to use the command interpreter Enter 24 in the main menu to bring up the system maintenance menu Enter 8 to go to Menu 24 8 Command Interpreter Mode See the included disk or zyxel com for more detailed information on these commands Note Use of undocumented commands or misconfiguration can damage the unit and possibly render it unusable Command Syntax The command keywords are incourier new font Enter the command keywords exactly as shown do not abbreviate The required fields in a command are enclosed in angle brackets lt gt The optional fields in a command are enclosed in squ
126. bilities and learn about other devices on the network In turn a device can leave a network smoothly and automatically when it is no longer in use 11 1 1 How do I know if I m using UPnP UPnP hardware is identified as an icon in the Network Connections folder Windows XP Each UPnP compatible device installed on your network will appear as a separate icon Selecting the icon ofa UPnP device will allow you to access the information and properties of that device 11 1 2 NAT Traversal UPnP NAT traversal automates the process of allowing an application to operate through NAT UPnP network devices can automatically configure network addressing announce their presence in the network to other UPnP devices and enable exchange of simple product and service descriptions NAT traversal allows the following Dynamic port mapping Learning public IP addresses Assigning lease times to mappings Windows Messenger is an example of an application that supports NAT traversal and UPnP See the Network Address Translation NAT Screens chapter for further information about NAT 11 1 3 Cautions with UPnP The automated nature of NAT traversal applications in establishing their own services and opening firewall ports may present network security issues Network information and configuration may also be obtained and modified by users in some network environments Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 94 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guid
127. bridging related parameters you need to configure Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options 1 To setup Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options shown in the next figure follow these steps 2 In menu 11 1 make sure the Bridge field is set to Yes Chapter 20 Bridging Setup 158 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 91 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Menu 11 1 Remote Node Rem Node Name Active Yes Encapsulation ENET ENCAP ultiplexing VC based Service Name N A Incoming Rem Login N A Rem Password N A Outgoing My Login N A My Password N A Authen N A ENT Press ER to Confirm or Profile Route IP Bridge Yes Edit IP Bridge Yes Edit ATM Options No Edit Advance Options N A Telco Option Allocated Budget min N A Period hr N A Schedule Sets N A ailed Up Connection N A Session Options Edit Filter Sets No Idle Timeout sec N A ESC to Cancel 3 Move the cursor to the Edit IP Bridge field then press SPACE BAR to set the value to Yes and press ENTER to edit Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Figure 92 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options IP Address Assignment Static Rem IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Rem Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 y WAN Addr 0 0 0 0 AT Full Feature Address Mapping Set 2 etric 2 Private No RIP Direction Both Version RIP 2B ulticast IGMP v2 IP Policies
128. cess which Prestige interface if any from which computers 27 2 Remote Management To disable remote management of a service select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field Enter 11 from menu 24 to display Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control 27 2 1 Remote Management Setup You may manage your Prestige from a remote location via the Internet WAN only the LAN only All LAN and WAN or Disable neither WAN only Internet ALL LAN and WAN LAN only Disable Neither Note If you enable remote management of a service but have applied a filter to block the service then you will not be able to remotely manage the Prestige using the service Enter 11 from menu 24 to display Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control shown next Chapter 27 Remote Management 224 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 155 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control Server Port Secured Cli TELNET Server Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control 23 Server Access LAN only nt IP 0 0 0 0 FTP Server Server Port Secured Cli 21 Server Access LAN only nt IP 0 0 0 0 Web Server Server Port Secured Cli 80 Server Access LAN only nt IP 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 70 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control FIELD DESCRIPTIO
129. chapter describes how to configure LAN settings 5 1 LAN Overview A Local Area Network LAN is a shared communication system to which many computers are attached A LAN is a computer network limited to the immediate area usually the same building or floor of a building The LAN screens can help you configure a LAN DHCP server and manage IP addresses 5 1 1 LANs WANs and the Prestige The actual physical connection determines whether the Prestige ports are LAN or WAN ports There are two separate IP networks one inside the LAN network and the other outside the WAN network as shown next Figure 15 LAN and WAN IP Addresses FREE REE RE RER REE ERE DEERE DEERE ny x LAN C af T P 1 Pr EE E I r In v 2 s a AA dp eee ne le een El gerennnnannannnennneneenzen Tw ze ununuennenununenne The interface to the LAN is Ethernet WAN D The interface to the Internet or a remote node is the DSL port Internet 3 mudo m mma a E M Chapter 5 LAN Setup 56 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 5 2 DNS Server Address DNS Domain Name System is for mapping a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a machine before you can access it The DNS server addresses
130. ction to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN 25 4 5 TFTP File Upload The Prestige also supports the uploading of firmware files using TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol over LAN Although TFTP should work over WAN as well it is not recommended To use TFTP your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients To transfer the firmware and the configuration file follow the procedure shown next 1 Use telnet from your computer to connect to the Prestige and log in Because TFTP does not have any security checks the Prestige records the IP address of the telnet client and accepts TFTP requests only from this address 2 Put the SMT in command interpreter CI mode by entering 8 in Menu 24 System Maintenance 3 Enter the command sys stdio 0 to disable the console timeout so the TFTP transfer will not be interrupted Enter sys stdio 5 to restore the five minute console timeout default when the file transfer is complete 4 Launch the TFTP client on your computer and connect to the Prestige Set the transfer mode to binary before starting data transfer 5 Use the TFTP client see the example below to transfer files between the Prestige and the computer The file name for the firmware is ras Note that the telnet connection must be active and the Prestige in CI mode before and during the TFTP transfer For details on TFTP commands see following example please consult the documentation
131. ctions File Edit View Favorites Tools Advanced Help Q Back v d pe Search Key Folders Ek e Network Connections Internet Gateway Network Tasks Internet Connection nabled Internet Connection Disable LAN or H Status Create a new connection Setup a home or small office network Disable this network device mj Rename this connection View status of this connection B Change settings of this connection Create Shortcut Delete ES m Rename Properties 3 In the Internet Connection Properties window click Settings to see the port mappings there were automatically created Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 100 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 41 Internet Connection Properties 2 Internet Connection Properties General Connect to the Internet using amp J Intemet Connection This connection allows you to connect to the Internet through a shared connection on another computer Show icon in notification area when connected 4 You may edit or delete the port mappings or click Add to manually add port mappings 101 Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 42 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Advances Sethings Services Select He services wing on pour neto that Inlemel use can SSA ES Services Pi marisa 192 168 165861
132. d sys reboot etc Chapter 23 SNMP Configuration 194 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The port number is its interface index under the interface group Table 60 Ports and Permanent Virtual Circuits PORT PVC PERMANENT VIRTUAL CIRCUIT 1 Ethernet LAN 2 1 2 13 12 14 xDSL 195 Chapter 23 SNMP Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 24 System Information and Diagnosis This chapter covers the information and diagnostic tools in SMT menus 24 1 to 24 4 24 1 Overview These tools include updates on system status port status log and trace capabilities and upgrades for the system software This chapter describes how to use these tools in detail Type 24 in the main menu to open Menu 24 System Maintenance as shown in the following figure Figure 132 Menu 24 System Maintenance Menu 24 System Maintenance System Status System Information and Console Port Speed Log and Trace Diagnostic Backup Configuration Restore Configuration Upload Firmware Command Interpreter Mode Call Control 0 Time and Date Setting 1 Remote Management H AH Ko OAN BWN PmP Enter Menu Selection Number 24 2 System Status The first selection System Status gives you information on the status and statistics of the ports as shown next System Status is a tool that can be used to monitor your Prestige Specifically it gi
133. d cells Type the PCR Sustain Cell Rate SCR Sustained Cell Rate is the mean cell rate of a bursty on off traffic source that can be sent at the peak rate and a parameter for burst traffic Type the SCR it must be less than the PCR Maximum Burst Size MBS Refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent at the peak rate Type the MBS The MBS must be less than 65535 My Login Configure the My Login and My Password fields for PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Enter the login name that your ISP gives you If you are using PPPoE encapsulation then this field must be of the form user domain where domain identifies your PPPoE service name Chapter 17 Internet Access 140 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 42 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup continued FIELD DESCRIPTION My Password Enter the password associated with the login name above ENET ENCAP Enter the gateway IP address supplied by your ISP when you are using ENET Gateway ENCAP encapsulation Idle Timeout This value specifies the number of idle seconds that elapse before the Prestige automatically disconnects the PPPOE session IP Address Press SPACE BAR to select Static or Dynamic address assignment Assignment IP Address Enter the IP address supplied by your ISP if applicable Network Address Press SPACE BAR to select None SUA Only or Full Feature Please see Translation Chapter 21
134. dcard Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes or No This field is N A when you choose DDNS client as your service provider When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 14 Menu 1 General Setup 126 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 127 Chapter 14 Menu 1 General Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide This chapter describes how to configure traffic redirect using menu 2 and 2 1 CHAPTER 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup 15 1 Introduction to WAN Backup Setup This chapter explains how to configure the Prestige for traffic redirect and dial backup connections 15 2 Configuring Dial Backup in Menu 2 From the main menu enter 2 to open menu 2 Figure 63 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup Press Check Check Check Check KeepAlive Fail Tolerance Rec Menu 2 Wan Backup Setup Mechanism DSL Link WAN IP Address1 0 0 WAN IP Address2 0 0s 0 40 WAN IP Address3 0 0 0 ooo 0 TC Traff ENTER to Confirm or E overy Interval sec 0 P Timeout sec 0 ic Redirect No SC to Cancel Chapter 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup 128 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 37 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup FIELD DESCRIPTIO
135. ddress Translation NAT for details and type that number here When SUA Only is selected in the NAT field the SMT uses NAT server set 1 in menu 15 2 see Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT for details Metric The metric represents the cost of transmission for routing purposes IP routing uses hop count as the cost measurement with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks Type a number that approximates the cost for this link The number need not be precise but it must be between 1 and 15 In practice 2 or 3 is usually a good number Private This determines if the Prestige will include the route to this remote node in its RIP broadcasts If set to Yes this route is kept private and not included in RIP broadcast lf No the route to this remote node will be propagated to other hosts through RIP broadcasts RIP Direction Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the RIP Direction Options are Both In Only Out Only or None Version Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select the RIP version Options are RIP 1 RIP 2B or RIP 2M Multicast IGMP v1 sets IGMP to version 1 IGMP v2 sets IGMP to version 2 and None disables IGMP IP Policies You can apply up to four IP Policy sets from 12 by typing in their numbers separated by commas Configure the filter sets in menu 25 first see Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing and then apply them here When you have completed
136. de After all the routing information is updated the computer can access the Prestige and the Internet as if it is in the same subnet as the Prestige 5 6 Configuring LAN Click LAN and LAN Setup to open the following screen Figure 17 LAN Setup LAN LAN Setup DHCP DHCP Server gt Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 Size of Client IP Pool Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server N A TCP IP IP Address 3216813 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 2550 RIP Direction Both gt RIP Version RIP 2B Multicast None gt Any IP Setup M Active The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 11 LAN Setup LABEL DESCRIPTION DHCP DHCP If set to Server your Prestige can assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95 Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client If set to None the DHCP server will be disabled If set to Relay the Prestige acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server field in this case When DHCP is used the following items need to be set 61 Chapter 5 LAN Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 11 LAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Client IP Pool This field specifies the first of t
137. ding what fields need to be configured 5 4 2 IP Address and Subnet Mask Refer to the IP Address and Subnet Mask section in Chapter 3 Wizard Setupfor this information 5 4 3 RIP Setup RIP Routing Information Protocol allows a router to exchange routing information with other routers The RIP Direction field controls the sending and receiving of RIP packets When set to Both the Prestige will broadcast its routing table periodically and incorporate the RIP information that it receives In Only the Prestige will not send any RIP packets but will accept all RIP packets received Out Only the Prestige will send out RIP packets but will not accept any RIP packets received None the Prestige will not send any RIP packets and will ignore any RIP packets received The Version field controls the format and the broadcasting method of the RIP packets that the Prestige sends it recognizes both formats when receiving RIP 1 is universally supported but RIP 2 carries more information RIP 1 is probably adequate for most networks unless you have an unusual network topology Both RIP 2B and RIP 2M sends the routing data in RIP 2 format the difference being that RIP 2B uses subnet broadcasting while RIP 2M uses multicasting Chapter 5 LAN Setup 58 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 5 4 4 Multicast Traditionally IP packets are transmitted in one of either two ways Unicast 1 sender 1 recipient or Broadc
138. dit Bridge Static Route neuen 160 Table 49 Applying NAT in Menus 4 amp 112 aus keen dene eks DANNE AKKERMAN eat 164 Table 50 SUA Address Mapping Rules u a 165 Table 571 Menu 13 1 1 FELSE re cb Lp bi ed tala Lip p Red 167 Table 52 Menu 15 1 1 1 Editing Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set 168 Table 53 Abbreviations Used in the Filter Rules Summary Menu nnen 181 Table 54 Rule Abbreviations Used Luise ccena ttr ko rta kia Rd ER x Kd 182 Table 55 Menu 218 1 TEPAP Filter Rule scene a URL E euo rivo ope tein ouii 183 Table 55 Menu Z1 1 5 1 Generic Filter Rule aan 186 Table SF Filter Sete able et m 190 Table 58 Menu 22 SNMP Configuration csiccssssssiccsssievstccaccessenaacenteneederausnusecssasi Rg 194 Table DONNE MAPS ans betas TEO EAEE 194 Table 60 Ports and Permanent Virtual Circuits nein 195 Table 61 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status 197 Table 62 Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information nnen ennenene eenen 199 Table 63 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting 201 Table 64 Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Menu Diagnostic nnee eneen 204 Table 65 Filename Convenios ana 207 Table 66 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients sene 209 Table 67 General Commands for GUI based TFTP Clients nennen ennen 211 Table 68 Menu 24 9 1 System Maintenance Budget Management ee 220 Table 69 Menu 24 10 System Maintenanc
139. dividual rule and configure the Type Local and Global Start End IPs Note An End IP address must be numerically greater than its corresponding IP Start address 167 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 100 Menu 15 1 1 1 Editing Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule Type One to One Local IP Start End N A Global IP Start End N A Server Mapping Set N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table explains the fields in this menu Table 52 Menu 15 1 1 1 Editing Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set FIELD DESCRIPTION Type Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select from a total of five types These are the mapping types discussed in the chapter on NAT web configurator screens Server allows you to specify multiple servers of different types behind NAT to this computer See the Example 3 Multiple Public IP Addresses With Inside Servers section for an example Local IP Only local IP fields are N A for server Global IP fields MUST be set for Server Start This is the starting local IP address ILA End This is the ending local IP address ILA If the rule is for all local IPs then put the Start IP as 0 0 0 0 and the End IP as 255 255 255 255 This field is N A for One to One and Server types Global IP Start This is the s
140. e All UPnP enabled devices may communicate freely with each other without additional configuration Disable UPnP if this is not your intention 11 2 UPnP and ZyXEL ZyXEL has achieved UPnP certification from the Universal Plug and Play Forum Creates UPnP Implementers Corp UIC ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports IGD 1 0 Internet Gateway Device At the time of writing ZyXEL s UPnP implementation supports Windows Messenger 4 6 and 4 7 while Windows Messenger 5 0 and Xbox are still being tested UPnP broadcasts are only allowed on the LAN See later sections for examples of installing UPnP in Windows XP and Windows Me as well as an example of using UPnP in Windows 11 2 1 Configuring UPnP From the Site Map in the main menu click UPnP under Advanced Setup to display the screen shown next Figure 34 Configuring UPnP UPNP Enable the Universal Plug and Play UPnP Service Allow users to make configuration changes through UPnP Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 24 Configuring UPnP LABEL DESCRIPTION Enable the Universal Plug Select this checkbox to activate UPnP Be aware that anyone could use and Play UPnP Service a UPnP application to open the web configurator s login screen without entering the Prestige s IP address although you must still enter the password to access the web configurator Allow users to make Select this check box to allow UPnP enabl
141. e Time and Date Setting 221 Table 70 Menu 24 11 Remote Management Control sse 225 Table 71 Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup anna 230 Table 72 Menu 25 1 1 IF Routing PONY iicet a a 231 Table 73 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup ans 239 Table 74 Troubleshooting the Start Up of Your Prestige __ 4444444404snnnennnennnnenne nn 242 Table 75 Troubleshooting the LAN LED asus keset eene ce 242 Table 76 Troubleshooting the DSL LED ski 243 Table 77 Troubleshooting the LAM Interface 1 iere rrr erede tanen eras 243 Table 78 Troubleshooting the WAN Interface nnn ennneneerennnennenvennnennene vennen 243 Table 79 Troubleshooting Internet Access ics eerie trennen rta eerta Ecce oe 244 23 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 80 Troubleshooting the Password esse aa 244 Table 81 Troubleshooting the Web Configurator uunsserunnsasenersennsenvenrsensenenenwensesen 245 Table 82 Troubleshooting Remote Management 245 Table 83 Gloss FAST ne 260 Table 84 Allowed IP Address Range By Class eese nennen eene nnne nnn nns 261 Table 85 Natural MASKB 261 Table 86 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation nnn unnsnenenrenseenvenrsenseenenrennsenenennnneenn 262 Table 87 Two Subnet Example sense 262 Table Ge SURE re eier 263 E 225 DRS lor P E 263 Table SO SUBNG 1 264 REIT Subnet ars
142. e instead of using an IP address that changes each time you reconnect Your friends or relatives will always be able to call you even if they don t know your IP address First of all you need to have registered a dynamic DNS account with www dyndns org This is for people with a dynamic IP from their ISP or DHCP server that would still like to have a domain name The Dynamic DNS service provider will give you a password or key 8 1 1 DYNDNS Wildcard Enabling the wildcard feature for your host causes yourhost dyndns org to be aliased to the same IP address as yourhost dyndns org This feature is useful if you want to be able to use for example www yourhost dyndns org and still reach your hostname Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot D use Dynamic DNS 8 2 Configuring Dynamic DNS To change your Prestige s DDNS click Dynamic DNS The screen appears as shown Chapter 8 Dynamic DNS Setup 86 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 30 Dynamic DNS Dynamic DNS Active Service Provider Host Name E mail Address User Password EE i Enable Wildcard Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 21 Dynamic DNS LABEL DESCRIPTION Active Select this check box to use dynamic DNS Service Provider This is the name of your Dynamic DNS service provider Host Names Type the doma
143. e Total This is the total connection time that has gone by within the allocated Budget budget that you set in menu 11 1 Elapsed Time Total Period The period is the time cycle in hours that the allocation budget is reset see menu 11 1 The elapsed time is the time used up within this period Enter 0 to update the screen or press ESC to return to the previous screen 26 3 Time and Date Setting The Prestige keeps track of the time and date There is also a software mechanism to set the time manually or get the current time and date from an external server when you turn on your Prestige Menu 24 10 allows you to update the time and date settings of your Prestige The real time is then displayed in the Prestige error logs Select menu 24 in the main menu to open Menu 24 System Maintenance as shown next Figure 153 Menu 24 System Maintenance Menu 24 System Maintenance 1 System Status 2 System Information and Console Port Speed 3 Log and Trace 4 Diagnostic 5 Backup Configuration 6 Restore Configuration 7 Upload Firmware 8 Command Interpreter Mode 9 Call Control 10 Time and Date Setting 11 Remote Management Enter Menu Selection Number Then enter 10 to go to Menu 24 10 System Maintenance Time and Date Setting to update the time and date settings of your Prestige as shown in the following screen Chapter 26 System Maintenance 220 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide
144. e Virtual Path Identifier and Virtual Channel Identifier that you entered in the first Wizard screen LAN Information MAC Address This is the MAC Media Access Control or Ethernet address unique to your Prestige IP Address This is the LAN port IP address IP Subnet Mask This is the LAN port IP subnet mask DHCP This is the WAN port DHCP role Server Relay not all Prestige models or None DHCP Start IP This is the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool DHCP Pool Size This is the number of IP addresses in the IP address pool Show Statistics Click Show Statistics to see the performance statistics such as number of packets sent and number of packets received for each port 12 2 1 System Statistics Click Show Statistics in the System Status screen to open the following screen Read only information here includes port status and packet specific statistics Also provided are system up time and poll interval s The Poll Interval s field is configurable Figure 50 System Status Show Statistics System up Time 3 03 27 CPU Load 5 66 WAN Port Statistics Link Status Down Upstream Speed 0 kbps Downstream Speed 0 kbps Node Link Status TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx B s Rx B s Up Time 1 PPPoA NA D o o D a 0 00 00 LAN Port Statistics Interface Status TxPkts RxPkts Collisions Ethernet Down 0 2787 4060 0 USB UP
145. e and Date LABEL DESCRIPTION Time Server Use Protocol when Bootup Select the time service protocol that your time server sends when you turn on the Prestige Not all time servers support all protocols so you may have to check with your ISP network administrator or use trial and error to find a protocol that works The main difference between them is the format Daytime RFC 867 format is day month year time zone of the server Time RFC 868 format displays a 4 byte integer giving the total number of seconds since 1970 1 1 at 0 0 0 NTP RFC 1305 is similar to Time RFC 868 Select None to enter the time and date manually IP Address or URL Enter the IP address or URL of your time server Check with your ISP network administrator if you are unsure of this information Time and Date Choose the time zone of your location This will set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Savings Select this option if you use daylight savings time Daylight saving is a period from late spring to early fallwhen many countries set their clocks ahead of normal local time by one hour to give more daytime light in the evening Start Date Enter the month and day that your daylight savings time starts on if you selected Daylight Savings End Date Enter the month and day that your daylight savings time ends on if you selected Daylight Savings Synchronize system c
146. e call if line not up Outgoing Data match Packet Filtering Send packet and reset a i e Se Idle Timer Match Drop Drop packet Drop packet packet if line not up if line notup k LT Send packet Send packet but do not reset but do not reset Idle Timer Idle Timer Two sets of factory filter rules have been configured in menu 21 to prevent NetBIOS traffic from triggering calls A summary of their filter rules is shown in the figures that follow The following figure illustrates the logic flow when executing a filter rule Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 178 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 117 Filter Rule Process Start ma iu Packet intoFilter Fetch First Filter Set Filter Set v Fetch Next Fetch First Filter Set Filter Rule A Fetch Next Filter Rule dl Yes Next Filter Se No Available Yes Next filter Rule Available Yes y Execute no Filter Rule Check Next Rule l Forward mr e o Drop Packet Accept Packet wa proe You can apply up to four filter sets to a particular port to block various types of packets Because each filter set can have up to six rules you can have a maximum of 24 rules active for
147. e in the Mode field select either PPPoA or RFC 1483 If you select Routing in the Mode field select PPPoA RFC 1483 ENET ENCAP or PPPoE Multiplex Select the method of multiplexing used by your ISP from the drop down list Choices are VC or LLC Virtual Circuit ID VPI Virtual Path Identifier and VCI Virtual Channel Identifier define a virtual circuit Refer to the appendix for more information VPI The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 Enter the VPI assigned to you VCI The valid range for the VCI is 32 to 65535 0 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic Enter the VCI assigned to you ATM QoS Type Select CBR Continuous Bit Rate to specify fixed always on bandwidth for voice or data traffic Select UBR Unspecified Bit Rate for applications that are non time sensitive such as e mail Select VBR Variable Bit Rate for bursty traffic and bandwidth sharing with other applications Cell Rate Cell rate configuration often helps eliminate traffic congestion that slows transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Peak Cell Rate Divide the DSL line rate bps by 424 the size of an ATM cell to find the Peak Cell Rate PCR This is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells Type the PCR here Sustain Cell Rate The Sustain Cell Rate SCR sets the average cell rate long term that can be transmitted Type the SCR which must be less t
148. e router s web configurator interface Successful TELNET login Someone has logged on to the router via telnet TELNET login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router via telnet Successful FTP login Someone has logged on to the router via ftp ETP login failed Someone has failed to log on to the router via ftp NAT Session Table is Full The maximum number of NAT session table entries has been exceeded and the table is full Starting Connectivity Monitor Starting Connectivity Monitor Time initialized by Daytime Server The router got the time and date from the Daytime server Time initialized by Time server The router got the time and date from the time server Time initialized by NTP server The router got the time and date from the NTP server Connect to Daytime server fail The router was not able to connect to the Daytime server Connect to Time server fail The router was not able to connect to the Time server Connect to NTP server fail The router was not able to connect to the NTP server Too large ICMP packet has been dropped The router dropped an ICMP packet that was too large SMT Session Begin An SMT management session has started SM End Session An SMT management session has ended Appendix G 274 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 98 System
149. e will try to bring up the connection when turned on and whenever the connection is down A nailed up connection can be very expensive for obvious reasons Do not specify a nailed up connection unless your telephone company offers flat rate service or you need a constant connection and the cost is of no concern 3 2 3 NAT NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 3 2 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup Second Screen The second wizard screen varies depending on what mode and encapsulation type you use All screens shown are with routing mode Configure the fields and click Next to continue Chapter 3 Wizard Setup 46 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 7 Internet Connection with PPPoE Wizard Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access Service Name User Name Password IP Address Connection Juser icp ch Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address 0 0 0 0 Connect on Demand Max Idle Timeout 0 sec Nailed Up Connection Network Address Translation SUA Only The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 5 Internet Connection with PPPoE LABEL DESCRIPTION Service Name Type the name of your PPPoE service here User Name Enter t
150. each protocol 151 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 83 Menu 11 6 for VC based Multiplexing Menu 11 6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options VPI VCI VC Multiplexing VC Options for IP VC Options for Bridge VPI 8 VPI 1 VCI 35 VCI 36 ATM QoS Type UBR ATM 00S Type N A Peak Cell Rat PCR 0 Peak Cell Rat PCR N A Sustain Cell Rate SCR 0 Sustain Cell Rat SCR N A Maximum Burst Size MBS 0 Maximum Burst Size MBR N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 18 5 2 LLC based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation For LLC based multiplexing or PPP encapsulation one VC carries multiple protocols with protocol identifying information being contained in each packet header Figure 84 Menu 11 6 for LLC based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation Menu 11 6 Remote Node ATM Layer Options VPI VCI LLC Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation VPI 8 VCI 35 ATM 00S Type UBR Peak Cell Rate PCR 0 Sustain Cell Rate SCR 0 Maximum Burst Size MBS 0 ENTER here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL In this case only one set of VPI and VCI numbers need be specified for all protocols The valid range for the VPI is 0 to 255 and for the VCI is 32 to 65535 1 to 31 is reserved for local management of ATM traffic 18 5 3 Advance Setup Options In menu 11 1 select PPPoE in the Encapsulation fi
151. ease refer to RFC 1700 for further information about port numbers Table 16 Services and Port Numbers SERVICES PORT NUMBER ECHO 7 FTP File Transfer Protocol 21 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 78 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 16 Services and Port Numbers continued SERVICES PORT NUMBER SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 25 DNS Domain Name System 53 Finger 79 HTTP Hyper Text Transfer protocol or WWW Web 80 POP3 Post Office Protocol 110 NNTP Network News Transport Protocol 119 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol 161 SNMP trap 162 PPTP Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 1723 7 3 3 Configuring Servers Behind SUA Example Let s say you want to assign ports 21 25 to one FTP Telnet and SMTP server A in the example port 80 to another B in the example and assign a default server IP address of 192 168 1 35 to a third C in the example You assign the LAN IP addresses and the ISP assigns the WAN IP address The NAT network appears as a single host on the Internet IP address assigned by ISP Figure 25 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example FTP Telnet SMTP Server 192 168 1 33 m 192 168 1 1 IP address assigned by ISP 7 4 Selecting the NAT Mode Click NAT to open the following screen 79 Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens Prestige 660RU Tx Series U
152. easy management Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige 30 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 1 1 1 Features of the Prestige The following sections describe the features of the Prestige High Speed Internet Access Your Prestige ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 router can support downstream transmission rates of up to 24Mbps and upstream transmission rates of 3 5Mbps Actual speeds attained depend on ISP DSLAM environment Zero Configuration Internet Access Once you connect and turn on the Prestige it automatically detects the Internet connection settings such as the VCI VPI numbers and the encapsulation method from the ISP and makes the necessary configuration changes In cases where additional account information such as an Internet account user name and password is required or the Prestige cannot connect to the ISP you will be redirected to web screen s for information input or troubleshooting Any IP The Any IP feature allows a computer to access the Internet and the Prestige without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet USB Port The USB port is useful if you have an USB enabled computer that does not have a network interface card for attaching to your Ethernet network Refer to Quick Start Guide for USB driver installation procedure in Windows 98 Second Edition Windows Me Millennium Edition Wi
153. eb configurator from the SITE MAP screen 39 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Click Wizard Setup to begin a series of screens to configure your Prestige for the first time Click a link under Advanced Setup to configure advanced Prestige features Click a link under Maintenance to see Prestige performance statistics upload firmware and back up restore or upload a configuration file Click Site Map to go to the Site Map screen Click Logout in the navigation panel when you have finished a Prestige management session Figure 5 Web Configurator Site Map Screen Wizard Setup Advanced Setup Maintenance Site Map Wizard Setup Password System Status LAN DHCP Table WAN Any IP Tabie NAT Diagnostic Security Firmware Dynamic DNS Time and Date Remote Management UPnP view embedded help D gt Note Click the WEHR icon located in the top right corner of most screens to Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary LINK SUB LINK FUNCTION Wizard Setup Connection Use these screens for initial configuration including general Setup setup ISP parameters for Internet Access and WAN IP DNS Server MAC address assignment Advanced Setup Password Use this screen to change your password LAN Use this screen to configure LAN DHCP and TCP IP settings WAN WAN Setup Use this screen to change the Prestige
154. ected filter set 1 in menu 21 Figure 119 NetBIOS WAN Filter Rules Summary Menu 21 2 Filter Rules Summary A Type Filter Rules mn 1 Y IP Pr 6 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 137 DN 2 Y IP Pr 6 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 138 DN 3 Y IP Pr 6 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 139 DN 4 Y IP Pr 17 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 137 DN 5 Y IP Pr 17 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 138 DN 6 Y IP Pr 17 SA 0 0 0 0 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 139 DF Enter Filter Rule Number 1 6 to Configure Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 180 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 120 NetBIOS LAN Filter Rules Summary NOP WN EF Menu 21 1 3 Filter Rules Summary Type Filter Rules Mmn IP Pr 17 SA 0 0 0 0 SP 137 DA 0 0 0 0 DP 53 NDF Enter Filter Rule Number 1 6 to Configure 22 3 Filter Rules Summary Menus The following tables briefly describe the abbreviations used in menus 21 1 1 and 21 1 2 Table 53 Abbreviations Used in the Filter Rules Summary Menu FIELD DESCRIPTION The filter rule number 1 to 6 A Active Y means the rule is active N means the rule is inactive Type The type of filter rule GEN for Generic IP for TCP IP Filter Rules These parameters are displayed here M More Y means there are more rules to check which form a rule chain with the present rule An action cannot be taken until the rule chain is complete
155. ed applications to configuration changes automatically configure the Prestige so that they can communicate through UPnP through the Prestige for example by using NAT traversal UPnP applications automatically reserve a NAT forwarding port in order to communicate with another UPnP enabled device this eliminates the need to manually configure port forwarding for the UPnP enabled application Apply Click Apply to save the setting to the Prestige Cancel Click Cancel to return to the previously saved settings 95 Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 11 3 Installing UPnP in Windows Example This section shows how to install UPnP in Windows Me and Windows XP Installing UPnP in Windows Me Follow the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows Me 1 Click Start and Control Panel Double click Add Remove Programs 2 Click on the Windows Setup tab and select Communication in the Components selection box Click Details Figure 35 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication 2x Install Uninstall Windows Setup Startup Disk To add of remove a component select or clear the check box If the check box is shaded only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components Gl Address Book Communications 5 6 MB A Desktop Themes 0 0 MB vl li Games 10 1 MB L 3 Mu
156. eed 10 100Mbps auto negotiating LAN interface s and a high speed ADSL port into a single package The Prestige is ideal for high speed Internet browsing and making LAN to LAN connections to remote networks The Prestige is an ADSL router compatible with the ADSL ADSL2 ADSL2 standards Maximum data rates attainable by the Prestige for each standard are shown in the next table Table 1 ADSL Standards DATARATESTANDARD UPSTREAM DOWNSTREAM ADSL 832 kbps 8Mbps ADSL2 3 5Mbps 12Mbps ADSL2 3 5Mbps 24Mbps Note The standard your ISP supports determines the maximum upstream and downstream speeds attainable Actual speeds attained also depend on the distance from your ISP line quality etc By integrating DSL and NAT the Prestige provides ease of installation and Internet access Provided with both USB and Ethernet ports computers can share local resources such as printers and files and access to the Internet simultaneously Models ending in 1 for example P660RU T1 denote a device that works over the analog telephone system POTS Plain Old Telephone Service Models ending in 3 denote a device that works over ISDN Integrated Synchronous Digital System Models ending in 7 denote a device that works over T ISDN UR 2 Note Only use firmware for your Prestige s specific model Refer to the D label on the bottom of your Prestige The web browser based Graphical User Interface GUI provides
157. een ee nn 264 Tl IE SUN ee N N 264 Table ERI I C euer a ee een 265 Table 94 EINE SUDPElS aaa 265 Table 95 Class C AH cU MS S s o 0 aan 265 Table 96 Class B Subnet PISANG aan 266 Table 97 System Maintenance LOS sinn sinn aaa REDE ana 274 Table 98 System Error LOGS a ea 275 Table 99 Packs Filer LOUS venir eben bees 275 TE we c erm m 275 Table 101 COR LOGS 5 ne eee i ba ek es denen ee leeren aeg 275 I A WE PPPOE qe PTT 276 Table TOS TEMP NOR casa castes ceeds E 276 Table 104 3303 Lege veieexatexcdtodivet qu e u ai ae LR RR PL SR a eU UA 277 Table 105 RFC 2408 ISAKMP Payload Types eene 277 24 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 25 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Preface Congratulations on your purchase of the Prestige 660RU Tx ADSL2 Ethernet USB Gateway Note Register your product online to receive e mail notices of firmware upgrades and information at www zyxel com for global products or at www us zyxel com for North American products Your Prestige is easy to install and configure About This User s Guide This manual is designed to guide you through the configuration of your Prestige for its various applications The web configurator parts of this guide contain background information on features configurable by web configurator The SMT parts of this guide contain background information solely on features not configurable by web configurator Note Use the web configurator
158. eld Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration 152 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 85 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Menu 11 Active Yes Rem Node Name MyISP Route IP 1 Remote Node Profile Bridge No Encapsulation PPPoE Edit IP Bridge No Multiplexing LLC based Edit ATM Options No Service Name Edit Advance Options Yes Incoming Telco Option Rem Login Allocated Budget min 0 Rem Password x Period hr 0 Outgoing Schedule Sets My Login ailed Up Connection No My Password Session Options Authen CHAP PAP Edit Filter Sets No Idle Timeout sec 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Move the cursor to the Edit Advance Options field press SPACE BAR to select Yes then press ENTER to display Menu 11 8 Advance Setup Options Figure 86 Menu 11 8 Advance Setup Options PPPoE pass through No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel enu 11 8 Advance Setup Options The following table describes the fields in this menu Table 45 Menu 11 8 Advance Setup Options FIELD DESCRIPTION PPPoE pass through Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and press ENTER to enable PPPoE pass through In addition to the Prestige s built in PPPoE client you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Prestige
159. enu 21 11 ERS du ee EAD DE re nk mn 150 Figure 82 Menu 2112 WEDS rm 151 Figure 83 Menu 11 6 for VC based Multiplexing escena 152 Figure 84 Menu 11 6 for LLC based Multiplexing or PPP Encapsulation 152 Figure 85 Menu 11 4 Remote Node Profile session erinnern ED tuer ease o uUa rune EDEN 153 Figure 86 Menu 11 8 Advance Setup Options L4 iret brit erne 153 Figure 87 Sample Static Routing Topology nen 154 Figure 88 Menu TZ Statie Route Tauben asien 155 Figure 89 Menu 12 1 IP Static Route Setup u deed sierra ata iata abba sin ela anw ne enn a Dua da 155 Figure 90 MonuT2 1 1 Edit IP Statie Route accion etti aar ia 155 Figure 91 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile 159 Figure 92 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options nanne eenen 159 Figure 93 Menu 12 3 1 Edit Bridge Static Raute users astra 160 Figure 94 Menu 4 Applying NAT for Internet Access ssseem e 163 Figure 95 Applying NAT in Menus 28 113 a edades EKLS ASKEN ERNE SES 163 Figure 96 Menu 15 NAT SUE are 164 Figure 97 Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets a ise bak asina tha a aeta Sata a a ena NE A Aun ua anna 165 Figure 98 Menu 15 1 255 SUA Address Mapping Rules see 165 Figure 29 Mang T5 T Piet Sl eisen 166 Figure 100 Menu 15 1 1 1 Editing Configuring an Individual Rule in a Set 168 Figure 101 Menu 15 2 NAT Server Sell ccc scsscccctiscssecscrsauvenscnscauseceorecassenneisauereso
160. er frequency range 0 4KHz while ADSL transmissions take place in the higher bandwidth range above 4KHz A microfilter acts as a low pass filter for your telephone to ensure that ADSL transmissions do not interfere with your telephone voice transmissions The use of a telephone microfilter is optional Appendix A 246 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 1 Connect a phone cable from the wall jack to the single jack end of the Y Connector 2 Connect a cable from the double jack end of the Y Connector to the wall side of the microfilter 3 Connect another cable from the double jack end of the Y Connector to the Prestige 4 Connect the phone side of the microfilter to your telephone as shown in the following figure Figure 169 Connecting a Microfilter Wall Dack Y connector Microfilter Wall Side Phone Side Prestige With ISDN This section relates to people who use their Prestige with ADSL over ISDN digital telephone service only The following is an example installation for the Prestige with ISDN Figure 170 Prestige with ISDN ISDN NT Ethernet m a Prestige 247 Appendix A Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address All computers must have a 10M or 100M Ethernet adapter card and TCP IP installed Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems and all versi
161. er or disable it When configured as a server the Prestige provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If you turn DHCP service off you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured 3 2 5 1 IP Pool Setup The Prestige is pre configured with a pool of 32 IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 for the client machines This leaves 31 IP addresses 192 168 1 2 to 192 168 1 32 excluding the Prestige itself which has a default IP of 192 168 1 1 for other server machines for example server for mail FTP telnet web etc that you may have 3 2 6 Internet Access Wizard Setup Third Screen Verify the settings in the screen shown next To change the LAN information on the Prestige click Change LAN Configurations Otherwise click Save Settings to save the configuration and skip to the section 3 13 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup 50 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 11 Internet Access Wizard Setup Third Screen Wizard Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access WAN Information Mode Routing Encapsulation PPPoE Multiplexing LLC VPINCT 8 35 Service Name User Name user icp ch Password IP Address Obtain an IP Address Automatically Network Address Translation SUA Only Connect on Demand Max Idle Timeout 0 sec LAN Information IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Mask 255 255 255 0 DHCP ON Client IP Pool Starting Address 192
162. eractive Applications 228 Internet Access 31 35 136 139 140 Internet access 42 136 Internet Access Setup 162 243 Internet access wizard setup 43 Internet Assigned Numbers AuthoritySee IANA 46 IP Address 44 58 78 111 134 156 160 183 199 204 230 IP Address Assignment 45 ENET ENCAP 45 PPPOA or PPPOE 45 RFC 1483 45 IP Addressing 260 IP alias 33 136 IP Alias Setup 137 IP Classes 260 IP Filter 185 Logic Flow 184 IP mask 183 IP Packet 185 IP Policies 232 IP policy 136 IP policy routing 228 IP Policy Routing IPPR 33 136 Applying an IP Policy 232 Ethernet IP Policies 232 Gateway 232 IP Pool Setup 50 IP Protocol 231 IP protocol 228 IP Routing Policy IPPR 228 Benefits 228 Cost Savings 228 Criteria 228 Load Sharing 228 Setup 229 IP Static Route 154 IP Static Route Setup 155 L LAN 197 LAN Setup 56 64 LAN TCP IP 58 LEDs 242 Link type 197 LLC based Multiplexing 152 Log and Trace 200 Log Facility 201 Logging Option 184 186 Logical networks 136 Login 144 MAC Media Access Control 112 MAC address 160 Main Menu 121 maintenance 108 management idle timeout period 39 Management Information Base MIB 193 Maximum Burst Size MBS 65 68 MBSSee Maximum Burst Size 140 MDI MDI X 32 Media Access Control 158 Message Logging 200 Metric 64 147 156 Multicast 59 147 Multiplexing 33 43 140 143 multiplexing 33 43 LLC based 43 VC based 43 Multiprotocol Encapsulat
163. eral Setup To edit menu 1 type 1 in the main menu and press ENTER Set the Route IP field to Yes by pressing SPACE BAR Chapter 17 Internet Access 138 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 71 Menu 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup System Name Location location Contact Person s Name Domain Name Edit Dynamic DNS No Route IP Yes Bridge No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 17 6 Internet Access Configuration Menu 4 allows you to enter the Internet Access information in one screen Menu 4 is actually a simplified setup for one of the remote nodes that you can access in menu 11 Before you configure your Prestige for Internet access you need to collect your Internet account information Use the Internet Account Information table in the Quick Start Guide to record your Internet account information Note that if you are using PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation then the only ISP information you need is a login name and password You only need to know the Ethernet Encapsulation Gateway IP address if you are using ENET ENCAP encapsulation From the main menu type 4 to display Menu 4 Internet Access Setup as shown next 139 Chapter 17 Internet Access Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 72 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ISP s Name MyISP Encapsulation RFC 1483 ultiplexing LLC based VPI 8 VCI
164. ers through different connections Quality of Service QoS Organizations can differentiate traffic by setting the precedence or TOS Type of Service values in the IP header at the periphery of the network to enable the backbone to prioritize traffic Cost Savings IPPR allows organizations to distribute interactive traffic on high bandwidth high cost paths while using low cost paths for batch traffic Load Sharing Network administrators can use IPPR to distribute traffic among multiple paths 28 3 Routing Policy Individual routing policies are used as part of the overall IPPR process A policy defines the matching criteria and the action to take when a packet meets the criteria The action is taken only when all the criteria are met The criteria includes the source address and port IP protocol ICMP UDP TCP etc destination address and port TOS and precedence fields in the IP header and length The inclusion of length criterion is to differentiate between interactive and bulk traffic Interactive applications for example telnet tend to have short packets while bulk traffic for example file transfer tends to have large packets The actions that can be taken include Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing 228 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide routing the packet to a different gateway and hence the outgoing interface setting the TOS and precedence fields in the IP header IPPR follows the existing pack
165. ess otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address text box below Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Refer to Appendix C IP Subnetting to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting ENET ENCAP You must specify a gateway IP address supplied by your ISP when you use ENET Gateway ENCAP in the Encapsulation field in the previous screen Network Select None SUA Only or Full Feature from the drop sown list box Refer to the NAT Address chapter for more details Translation Back Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen Next Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen Figure 10 Internet Connection with PPPoA Connection Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access User Name Password IP Address Connection ChangeMe Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address Connect on Demand Max Idle Timeout 0 sec Nailed Up Connection Network Address Translation SUA Only 49 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 8 Internet Connection with PPPoA LABEL DESCRIPTION User Name Enter the login name that your ISP gives you Password Enter the password associated with the user name above IP Address This option is available if you select Routing in the M
166. esses Every machine on the Internet must have a unique address If your networks are isolated from the Internet for example only between your two branch offices you can assign any IP addresses to the hosts without problems However the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority IANA has reserved the following three blocks of IP addresses specifically for private networks e 10 0 0 0 10 255 255 255 172 16 0 0 172 31 255 255 192 168 0 0 192 168 255 255 You can obtain your IP address from the IANA from an ISP or it can be assigned from a private network If you belong to a small organization and your Internet access is through an ISP the ISP can provide you with the Internet addresses for your local networks On the other hand if you are part of a much larger organization you should consult your network administrator for the appropriate IP addresses Note Regardless of your particular situation do not create an arbitrary IP D address always follow the guidelines above For more information on address assignment please refer to RFC 1597 Address Allocation for Private Internets and RFC 1466 Guidelines for Management of IP Address Space 3 2 2 Nailed Up Connection PPP A nailed up connection is a dial up line where the connection is always up regardless of traffic demand The Prestige does two things when you specify a nailed up connection The first is that idle timeout is disabled The second is that the Prestig
167. et filtering facility of RAS in style and in implementation The policies are divided into sets where related policies are grouped together A user defines the policies before applying them to an interface or a remote node in the same fashion as the filters There are 12 policy sets with six policies in each set 28 4 IP Routing Policy Setup Menu 25 shows all the policies defined Figure 156 Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup 12 Enter Policy Set Number to Configure 0 Edit Name N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel To setup a routing policy perform the following procedures 1 Type 25 in the main menu to open Menu 25 IP Routing Policy Setup 2 Type the index of the policy set you want to configure to open Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup Menu 25 1 shows the summary of a policy set including the criteria and the action of a single policy and whether a policy is active or not Each policy contains two lines The former part is the criteria of the incoming packet and the latter is the action Between these two parts separator means the action is taken on criteria matched and separator means the action is taken on criteria not matched 229 Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 157 Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setu
168. f empty rules For example if you have already configured rules 1 to 6 in your current set and now you configure rule number 9 In the set summary screen the new rule will be rule 7 not 9 Now if you delete rule 4 rules 5 to 7 will be pushed up by 1 rule so old rules 5 6 and 7 become new rules 4 5 and 6 To change your Prestige s address mapping settings click NAT Select Full Feature and click Edit Details to open the following screen Figure 28 Address Mapping Rules NAT Address Mapping Rules Rule 3 Rule 4 Rule 5 Rule 6 Rule7 Rule 8 Rule 9 Rule 10 Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 19 Address Mapping Rules LABEL DESCRIPTION Local Start IP This is the starting Inside Local IP Address ILA Local IP addresses are N A for Server port mapping Local End IP This is the end Inside Local IP Address ILA If the rule is for all local IP addresses then this field displays 0 0 0 0 as the Local Start IP address and 255 255 255 255 as the Local End IP address This field is N A for One to one and Server mapping types Global Start IP This is the starting Inside Global IP Address IGA Enter 0 0 0 0 here if you have a dynamic IP address from your ISP You can only do this for Many to One and Server mapping types Global End IP This is the ending Inside Global IP Addre
169. features If you cannot access the Internet open the web configurator again to confirm that the Internet settings you configured in the Wizard Setup are correct 53 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER Password Setup This chapter provides information on the Password screen 4 1 Password Overview It is highly recommended that you change the password for accessing the Prestige 4 1 1 Configuring Password To change your Prestige s password recommended click Password in the Site Map screen The screen appears as shown Figure 14 Password Password Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Please record your new password whenever you change it The system will lock you out if you have forgotten your password Apply Cancel The following table describes the fields in this screen Table 10 Password LABEL DESCRIPTION Old Password Type the default password or the existing password you use to access the system in this field New Password Type the new password in this field Retype to Confirm Type the new password again in this field Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 4 Password Setup 54 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 55 Chapter 4 Password Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 5 LAN Setup This
170. fic leaving the Prestige You may apply filter rules for protocol or device filters See earlier in this section for information on types of filters Call Filter Sets Apply filters to decide if a packet should be allowed to trigger a call 22 7 1 Ethernet Traffic You seldom need to filter Ethernet traffic however the filter sets may be useful to block certain packets reduce traffic and prevent security breaches Go to menu 3 1 shown next and type the number s of the filter set s that you want to apply as appropriate You can choose up to four filter sets from twelve by typing their numbers separated by commas for example 3 4 6 11 The factory default filter set NetBIOS LAN is inserted in the protocol filters field under Input Filter Sets in menu 3 1 in order to prevent local NetBIOS messages from triggering calls to the DNS server Figure 128 Filtering Ethernet Traffic Menu 3 1 LAN Port Filter Setup Input Filter Sets protocol filters 3 Apply filter 3 to block NETBIOS traffic from the LAN device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 22 7 2 Remote Node Filters Go to menu 11 5 shown next and type the number s of the filter set s as appropriate You can cascade up to four filter sets by typing their numbers separated by commas The factory default filter set NetBIOS WAN is in
171. fies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Size of Client IP Pool This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool Primary DNS Server Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask Secondary DNS Server As above Back Click Back to go back to the previous screen Finish Click Finish to save the settings and proceed to the next wizard screen Chapter 3 Wizard Setup 52 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 3 2 7 Internet Access Wizard Setup Connection Test The Prestige automatically tests the connection to the computer s connected to the LAN ports To test the connection from the Prestige to the ISP click Start Diagnose Otherwise click Return to Main Menu to go back to the Site Map screen Figure 13 Internet Access Wizard Setup Connection Tests Wizard Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access LAN connections Test your Ethernet Connection WAN connections Test ADSL synchronization Test ADSL ATM OAM loopback test Test PPP PPPOE server connection Ping default gateway Start Diagnose Return to Main Menu 3 2 7 1 Test Your Internet Connection Launch your web browser and navigate to www zyxel com Internet access is just the beginning Refer to the rest of this User s Guide for more detailed information on the complete range of Prestige
172. ft Dial Up Networking software can activate and therefore requires no new learning or procedures for Windows users One of the benefits of PPPOE is the ability to let you access one of multiple network services a function known as dynamic service selection This enables the service provider to easily create and offer new IP services for individuals Operationally PPPOE saves significant effort for both you and the ISP or carrier as it requires no specific configuration of the broadband modem at the customer site By implementing PPPOE directly on the Prestige rather than individual computers the computers on the LAN do not need PPPOE software installed since the Prestige does that part of the task Furthermore with NAT all of the LANS computers will have access 6 4 Traffic Shaping Traffic Shaping is an agreement between the carrier and the subscriber to regulate the average rate and fluctuations of data transmission over an ATM network This agreement helps eliminate congestion which is important for transmission of real time data such as audio and video connections Peak Cell Rate PCR is the maximum rate at which the sender can send cells This parameter may be lower but not higher than the maximum line speed 1 ATM cell is 53 bytes 424 bits so a maximum speed of 832Kbps gives a maximum PCR of 1962 cells sec This rate is not guaranteed because it is dependent on the line speed Sustained Cell Rate SCR is the mean cell
173. ge 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 27 3 Remote Management and NAT When NAT is enabled Use the Prestige s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN Use the Prestige s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN 27 4 System Timeout There is a default system management idle timeout of five minutes three hundred seconds The Prestige automatically logs you out if the management session remains idle for longer than this timeout period The management session does not time out when it is continuously updating the status in menu 24 1 or when sys stdio has been changed on the command line Chapter 27 Remote Management 226 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 227 Chapter 27 Remote Management Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 28 IP Policy Routing This chapter covers setting and applying policies used for IP routing 28 1 IP Policy Routing Overview Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the IAD takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Routing Policy IPPR provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator Policy based routing is applied to incoming packets on a per interface basis prior to the normal routing 28 2 Benefits of IP Policy Routing Source Based Routing Network administrators can use policy based routing to direct traffic from different us
174. ge about the networks beyond the remote nodes Figure 87 Sample Static Routing Topology N1 u 1 VA PA ii VA a PA 19 2 Configuration 1 To configure an IP static route use Menu 12 Static Route Setup shown next Chapter 19 Static Route Setup 154 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 88 Menu 12 Static Route Setup Menu 12 Static Route Setup 1 IP Static Route 3 Bridge Static Route Pleas nter selection 2 From menu 12 select 1 to open Menu 12 1 IP Static Route Setup shown next Figure 89 Menu 12 1 IP Static Route Setup Menu 12 1 IP Static Route Setup AANA OF WN EF 93 10 Ts 22 13 14 15 165 Enter selection number 3 Now type the route number of a static route you want to configure Figure 90 Menu12 1 1 Edit IP Static Route Menu 12 1 1 Edit IP Static Route Route 1 Route Name Active No Destination IP Address IP Subnet Mask Gateway IP Address etric 2 Private No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 155 Chapter 19 Static Route Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The following table describes the fields for Menu 12 1 1 Edit IP Static Route Setup Table 46 Menu12 1 1 Edit IP Static Route FIELD DESCRIPTION Route This is the index number of the static route that you chose in menu
175. han the PCR Note that system default is 0 cells sec Maximum Burst Size Maximum Burst Size MBS refers to the maximum number of cells that can be sent atthe peak rate Type the MBS which is less than 65535 Login Information PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only Service Name PPPoE only Type the name of your PPPoE service here User Name Enter the user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Password Enter the password associated with the user name above IP Address This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address field below Connection PPPoA and PPPoE encapsulation only The schedule rule s in SMT menu 26 have priority over your Connection settings Nailed Up Connection Select Nailed Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time The Prestige will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected Connect on Demand Select Connect on Demand when you don t want the con
176. he Ethernet port Table 40 TCP IP Ethernet Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION TCP IP Setup IP Address Enter the LAN IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation IP Subnet Mask Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige refer to Appendix C IP Subnetting for more information RIP Direction Press SPACE BAR to select the RIP direction Choices are Both In Only Out Only or None Version Press SPACE BAR to select the RIP version Choices are RIP 1 RIP 2B or RIP 2M Multicast IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a Multicast group The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and version 2 IGMP v2 Press the SPACE BAR to enable IP Multicasting or select None to disable it IP Policies Create policies using SMT menu 25 see Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing and apply them on the Prestige LAN interface here You can apply up to four IP policy sets from twelve by entering their numbers separated by commas Edit IP Alias The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network Press SPACE BAR to change No to Yes and press ENTER to display Menu 3 2 1 Chapter 1
177. he IP Settings tab and click OK Do one or more of the following if you want to configure additional IP addresses In the IP Settings tab in IP addresses click Add In TCP IP Address type an IP address in IP address and a subnet mask in Subnet mask and then click Add Repeat the above two steps for each IP address you want to add Configure additional default gateways in the IP Settings tab by clicking Add in Default gateways In TCP IP Gateway Address type the IP address of the default gateway in Gateway To manually configure a default metric the number of transmission hops clear the Automatic metric check box and type a metric in Metric Click Add Repeat the previous three steps for each default gateway you want to add e Click OK when finished 7 Inthe Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window the General tab in Windows XP Appendix B 254 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Click Obtain DNS server address automatically if you do not know your DNS server IP address es If you know your DNS server IP address es click Use the following DNS server addresses and type them in the Preferred DNS server and Alternate DNS server fields If you have previously configured DNS servers click Advanced and then the DNS tab to order them Figure 179 Windows XP Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties General Alternate Configuration You can get IP
178. he System Name field is for identification purposes However because some ISPs check this name you should enter your computer s Computer Name n Windows 95 98 click Start Settings Control Panel Network Click the Identification tab note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name In Windows 2000 click Start Settings Control Panel and then double click System Click the Network Identification tab and then the Properties button Note the entry for the Computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name In Windows XP click start My Computer View system information and then click the Computer Name tab Note the entry in the Full computer name field and enter it as the Prestige System Name The Domain Name entry is what is propagated to the DHCP clients on the LAN If you leave this blank the domain name obtained by DHCP from the ISP is used While you must enter the host name System Name on each individual computer the domain name can be assigned from the Prestige via DHCP 14 2 Procedure To Configure Menu 1 Enter 1 in the Main Menu to open Menu 1 General Setup shown next Chapter 14 Menu 1 General Setup 124 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 61 Menu 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup System Name Location Contact Person s Name Domain Name Edit Dynamic DNS No Route IP Yes Bridge No Press ENTER to Confirm
179. he contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Starting Address Size of Client IP Pool This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool Primary DNS Server Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask Secondary DNS Server As above Remote DHCP Server If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server here TCP IP IP Address Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation for example 192 168 1 1 factory default IP Subnet Mask Type the subnet mask assigned to you by your ISP if given RIP Direction Select the RIP direction from None Both In Only and Out Only RIP Version Select the RIP version from RIP 1 RIP 2B and RIP 2M Multicast IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol is a network layer protocol used to establish membership in a multicast group The Prestige supports both IGMP version 1 IGMP v1 and IGMP v2 Select None to disable it Any IP Setup Select the Active checkbox to enable the Any IP feature This allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer even when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet When you disable the Any IP feature only computers with dyn
180. he user name exactly as your ISP assigned If assigned a name in the form user domain where domain identifies a service name then enter both components exactly as given Password Enter the password associated with the user name above IP Address A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address otherwise select Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the text box below Connection Select Connect on Demand when you don t want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in seconds in the Max Idle Timeout field The default setting selects Connection on Demand with 0 as the idle time out which means the Internet session will not timeout Select Nailed Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time The Prestige will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected The schedule rule s in SMT menu 26 has priority over your Connection settings Network Select None SUA Only or Full Feature from the drop sown list box Refer to the NAT Address chapter for more details Translation Back Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen Next Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen 47 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 8 Interne
181. hernet Set p sun a are 158 20 2 1 Remote Node Bridging Setup nanne anneennnnnnnen eenen eenn ennnen 158 20 2 2 Bridge Statie Route SUP aan ann n A aE a AERENCA 160 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 22 eseeeseeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeees 162 21 1 SUA Single User Account Versus NAT aaa na 162 Lero NO NAT e eek 162 ONAT BEU cronice er Nebel 164 PUST Address Mapping SES anna 164 21 3 1 1 SUA Address Mapping Set ac ba 165 21 3 1 2 User Defined Address Mapping Sets 0 nn 166 21 13 Ordering Your RUBS sun en hr PPE aa ER Ea ipn 167 21 4 Configuring a Server behind NAT euere een 168 21 5 General WAT Examples een 170 21 5 1 Example 1 Internet Access Only le 170 21 5 2 Example 2 Internet Access with an Inside Server 171 21 5 3 Example 3 Multiple Public IP Addresses With Inside Servers 172 21 5 4 Example 4 NAT Unfriendly Application Programs 175 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration C 178 22 AAE Fed MEE t eins 178 22 1 1 The Filter Structure of the Prestige nennen ana 179 22 2 Gonfiguring a Filter Set Tor the Prestige cccsiccssscrtsscssecisavessees deve senmicannecevenss 180 22 3 Filter Rules Summary Menus user ade Ebr E DUE eta auo 181 224 Configuring a Filler eec ANNS 182 224 1 TEPAP Filer RUS Lu c eno eb DOR a 182 22 4 2 Genelle Fiter le a na a 185 Fraga cass
182. igure your IP routing policy 26 Schedule Setup Use this menu to schedule outgoing calls 99 Exit Use this to exit from SMT and return to a blank screen 121 Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 13 3 Changing the System Password Change the Prestige default password by following the steps shown next 1 Enter 23 in the main menu to display Menu 23 System Password as shown next 2 Type your existing system password in the Old Password field for example 1234 and press ENTER Figure 60 Menu 23 Change Password Menu 23 System Password Old Password New Password Retype to confirm Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL 3 Type your new system password in the New Password field up to 30 characters and press ENTER 4 Re type your new system password in the Retype to confirm field for confirmation and press ENTER Note Note that as you type a password the screen displays an for each character you type Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT 122 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 123 Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 14 Menu 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup contains administrative and system related information 14 1 General Setup Menu 1 General Setup contains administrative and system related information shown next T
183. igured one when the router generates a syslog The facility is defined in the web MAIN MENU gt LOGS gt Log Settings page The severity is the log s syslog class The definition of messages and notes are defined in the various log charts throughout this appendix The devlD is the last three characters of the MAC address of the router s LAN port The cat is the same as the category in the router s logs The following table shows RFC 2408 ISAKMP payload types that the log displays Please refer to the RFC for detailed information on each type Table 105 RFC 2408 ISAKMP Payload Types LOG DISPLAY PAYLOAD TYPE SA Security Association PROP Proposal TRANS Transform 277 Appendix G Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 105 RFC 2408 ISAKMP Payload Types continued LOG DISPLAY PAYLOAD TYPE KE Key Exchange ID Identification CER Certificate CER_REQ Certificate Request HASH Hash SIG Signature NONCE Nonce NOTFY Notification DE Delete VID Vendor ID Appendix G 278 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 279 Appendix G Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide A Address Assignment 57 Address mapping 82 Address Resolution Protocol ARP 60 ADSL what is it 28 ADSLstandards 30 Alternative Subnet Mask Notation 262 Any IP 31 59 How it works 60 note 60 Any IP Setup 62 Any I
184. in name assigned to your Prestige by your Dynamic DNS provider E mail Address Type your e mail address User Type your user name Password Type the password assigned to you Enable Wildcard Select the check box to enable DYNDNS Wildcard Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 87 Chapter 8 Dynamic DNS Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 9 Time and Date This screen is not available on all models Use this screen to configure the Prestige s time and date settings 9 1 Configuring Time and Date To change your Prestige s time and date click Time And Date The screen appears as shown Use this screen to configure the Prestige s time based on your local time zone Figure 31 Time and Date Time and Date Time Server Use Protocol when Bootup None IP Address or URL N A Time and Date GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London Daylight Savings Start Date month day End Date fi month fi day Synchronize system clock with Time Server now This may take up to 60 seconds Date Current Date 2000 101 for New Date yyyy mm dd 12000 foi foi Time Current Time New Time Apply Cancel The following table describes the labels in this screen Chapter 9 Time and Date 88 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 22 Tim
185. inal menus via Telnet how to navigate the SMT and how to configure SMT menus 13 1 1 Procedure for SMT Configuration via Telnet The following procedure details how to telnet into your Prestige 1 In Windows click Start usually in the bottom left corner Run and then type telnet 192 168 1 1 the default IP address and click OK 2 Enter 1234 in the Password field 3 After entering the password you will see the main menu Please note that if there is no activity for longer than five minutes default timeout period after you log in your Prestige will automatically log you out You will then have to telnet into the Prestige again 13 1 2 Entering Password The login screen appears after you press ENTER prompting you to enter the password as shown next For your first login enter the default password 1234 As you type the password the screen displays an asterisk for each character you type Please note that if there is no activity for longer than five minutes after you log in your Prestige will automatically log you out Chapter 13 Introducing the SMT 118 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 58 Login Screen Enter Password 13 1 3 Prestige SMT Menu Overview The following figure gives you an overview of the various SMT menu screens of your Prestige Figure 59 Prestige SMT Menu Overview Menu 12 State Routing Setug Menu 12 1 1 Edit IP Satic Route Menu 25
186. ing all rules in a filter set must be of the same class for instance protocol filters or generic filters The class of a filter set is determined by the first rule that you create When applying the filter sets to a port separate menu fields are provided for protocol and device filter sets If you include a protocol filter set in a device filters field or vice versa the Prestige will warn you and will not allow you to save 22 4 1 TCP IP Filter Rule This section shows you how to configure a TCP IP filter rule TCP IP rules allow you to base the rule on the fields in the IP and the upper layer protocol for example UDP and TCP headers To configure TCP IP rules select TCP IP Filter Rule from the Filter Type field and press ENTER to open Menu 21 x 1 TCP IP Filter Rule as shown next Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 182 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 121 Menu 21 x 1 TCP IP Filter Rule Menu 21 1 1 TCP IP Filter Rule Filter 1 1 Filter Type TCP IP Filter Rule Active No IP Protocol 0 IP Source Route No Destination IP Addr IP Mask Port Port Comp None Source IP Addr IP Mask Port Port Comp None TCP Estab N A More No Log None Action Matched Check Next Rul Action Not Matched Check xt Rul Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following table describes how to configure your TCP IP filter rule Table 55 Menu 21 x
187. ing Policy Setup to see if the rule is added correctly 4 Create another policy set in menu 25 5 Create a rule in menu 25 1 for this set to route packets from any host IP 0 0 0 0 means any host with protocol TCP and port FTP access through another gateway 192 168 1 100 IP Routing Policy Example 2 Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy Policy Set Name set2 Active Yes Criteria IP Protocol 6 Type of Service Don t Care Precedenc Source addr start port start Destination addr start port start Action Matched Gateway addr Don t Care 0 0 0 0end N A 0 0 0 0 0 20 192 168 1 100 Type of Service No Change Precedenc Press No Change ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Packet length 10 Len Comp N A end N A end N A end 21 Log No 6 Check Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup to see if the rule is added correctly 7 Apply both policy sets in menu 3 2 as shown next 235 Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 164 Applying IP Policies Example Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup DHCP Setup DHCP Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 Size of Client IP Pool 64 Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server N A TCP IP Setup IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 RIP Direction Both Version RIP 1 ulticast None
188. international telephone call Customer Support Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table of Contents gt eee serene ED a 2 Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement 3 FA KEE LINIEN cess cates ERE Nm 4 Customer SUPPO as iccedaa rds rd Exe 4A oda andreas 5 Er I R6 00 e 6 Edda nenne 16 SL Wr qc 22 dioi o FRENTE 26 Dici ern fin Me er earrer rrr Tre 28 Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige e ide rine iir ind pSR tad bx HER enden penhana dina 30 1 1 Introducing c c a M 30 1 1 1 Features of the Prestige scanners T T UU eieiei se alien 31 1 1 2 Applications for the Prestige nnen 35 NT MORE ae 35 1 1 22 LAN f LAN Application ara 35 1 1 3 Prestige Hardware Installation and Connection nnn nennen 36 QE Front an LEDS PP T 36 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator nanne enenenennnnnneeeeneeeennnnnnnnennenvennn 38 2 1 Web Configurator OVOTVIBW scoscccckt eue ra ctr etur rra ke mUp Ez ck x esr a bk UE EE abet amis mt 38 2 1 1 Accessing the Prestige Web Configurator nanne rene enneenenn 38 21 2 Reselling he Presiige elek 39 2 1 2 1 Using the Reset BUOM 5 aA aaa 39 2 1 3 Navigating the Prestige Web Configurator nnee 39 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup 42 SA IST EE 42 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide SV STOL 975 615 FSI ETS o m 42 a We DUE ENCA
189. ion 43 My WAN Address 146 N Nailed Up Connection 46 NAT 45 78 79 187 Address mapping rule 83 Application 76 Applying NAT in the SMT Menus 162 Configuring 164 Definitions 74 Examples 170 How it works 75 Mapping Types 76 Non NAT Friendly Application Programs 175 Ordering Rules 167 What it does 75 What NAT does 75 NAT Network Address Translation 74 NAT mode 80 NAT Traversal 94 navigating the web configurator 39 Network Address Translation 141 Network Address Translation NAT 32 162 Network Management 34 79 282 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide NNTP 79 P Packet Error 197 Received 197 Transmitted 197 Packet Triggered 202 Packets 197 PAP 145 Password 54 118 122 144 193 password 118 244 Peak Cell Rate PCR 65 68 Ping 204 Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 42 Point to Point 28 Point to Point Tunneling Protocol 79 policy based routing 228 POP3 79 Port Numbers 78 power 242 PPP Encapsulation 152 PPP Log 203 PPP session over Ethernet PPP over Ethernet RFC 2516 42 PPPOA 143 PPPOE 65 268 Benefits 65 PPPOE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet 32 65 PPPOE pass through 153 PPTP 79 Precedence 228 231 Private 147 156 Protocol 183 Protocol filter 187 Protocol Filter Rules 187 PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit 42 Q Quality of Service 228 Quick Start Guide 27 R RAS 199 229 Rate Receiving 197 Transmission 197 reini
190. ion for scenarios when remote management may not be possible Use the Prestige s WAN IP address when configuring from the WAN Use the Prestige s LAN IP address when configuring from the LAN Refer to for instructions on checking your LAN connection Refer to the Problems with the LAN Interface section for instructions on checking your WAN connection See also the Problems with the Web Configurator section 245 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Appendix A Splitters and Microfilters This appendix tells you how to install a POTS splitter or a telephone microfilter Connecting a POTS Splitter When you use the Full Rate Gdmt ADSL standard you can use a POTS Plain Old Telephone Service splitter to separate the telephone and ADSL signals This allows simultaneous Internet access and telephone service on the same line A splitter also eliminates the destructive interference conditions caused by telephone sets Install the POTS splitter at the point where the telephone line enters your residence as shown in the following figure Figure 168 Connecting a POTS Splitter Wall Jack POTS Splitter 1 Connect the side labeled Phone to your telephone 2 Connect the side labeled Modem to your Prestige 3 Connect the side labeled Line to the telephone wall jack Telephone Microfilters Telephone voice transmissions take place in the low
191. l 5d P Search Key Folders EN Address My Network Places Local Network Network Tasks gd Add a network place e View network connections yXEL Prestige 650R 3 Sharing Gate 2 Set up a home or small Create Shortcut office network Fr View workgroup computers Rename Properties Other Places A 6 Right click on the icon for your Prestige and select Properties A properties window displays with basic information about the Prestige 105 Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 48 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example ZyXEL Prestige 650R 31 Internet Sharing Gateway Pr E Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 106 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 107 Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 12 Maintenance This chapter displays system information such as ZyNOS firmware port IP addresses and port traffic statistics 12 1 Maintenance Overview The maintenance screens can help you view system information upload new firmware manage configuration and restart your Prestige 12 2 System Status Screen Click System Status to open the following screen where you can use to monitor your Prestige Note that these fields are READ ONLY and only for diagnostic purposes Chapter 12 Maintenance 108 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s
192. l SNMP messages it receives regardless of source Trap Community Type the trap community which is the password sent with each trap to the SNMP manager Destination Type the IP address of the station to send your SNMP traps to When you have completed this menu press ENTER atthe prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 23 4 SNMP Traps The Prestige will send traps to the SNMP manager when any one ofthe following events occurs Table 59 SNMP Traps TRAP TRAP NAME DESCRIPTION 1 coldStart defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent after booting power on 2 warmStart defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent after booting software reboot linkDown defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent with the port number when any of the links are down See the following table 4 linkUp defined in RFC 1215 A trap is sent with the port number authenticationFailure defined in A trap is sent to the manager when receiving any RFC 1215 SNMP gets or sets requirements with wrong community password 6 whyReboot defined in ZYXEL MIB A trap is sent with the reason of restart before rebooting when the system is going to restart warm start 6a For intentional reboot A trap is sent with the message System reboot by user if reboot is done intentionally for example download new files CI comman
193. l ID within the WAN call the call reference number which starts from 1 and increments by 1 for each new call str C01 Outgoing Call dev xx ch xx dev device No ch channel No C01 Incoming Call xxxxBps xxxxx L2TP xxxxx Remote Call ID C01 Incoming Call xxxx connected speed xxxxx Remote Call ID L02 Tunnel Connected L2TP C02 OutCall Connected xxxx connected speed xxxxx Remote Call ID c02 CLID call refused L02 Call Terminated C02 Call Terminated Jul 19 11 19 27 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 1 C01 Outgoing Call dev 2 ch 0 40002 Jul 19 11 19 32 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 1 C02 OutCall Connected 64000 40002 Jul 19 11 20 06 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL board 0 line 0 channel 0 call 1 C02 Call Terminated 2 Packet Triggered SdemdSyslogSend SYSLOG PKTTRI SYSLOG NOTICE String String Packet trigger Protocol xx Data xxxxXXXXXX X Protocol 1 IP 2 IPX 3 IPXHC 4 BPDU 5 ATALK 6 IPNG Data We will send forty eight Hex characters to the server Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis 202 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 140 Syslog Example continued Jul 19 11 28 39 Data 4500003c1001 6d6e6 7071727374 Jul 19 11 28 56 Data 4500002c1b01 020405b4 Jul 19 11 29 06 3 Filter Log 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL 192 168 102 2 ZYXEL Data 450000282401 00001
194. lect Internet Protocol TCP IP under the General tab in Win XP and click Properties Figure 177 Windows XP Local Area Connection Properties Local Area Connection Properties General Authentication Advanced Connect using Accton EN1207D TX PCI Fast Ethemet Adapter i This connection uses the following items v ei Client for Microsoft Networks v a File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks M Jill QoS Packet Scheduler Internet Protocol TCP IP J Description Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol The default wide area network protocol that provides communication across diverse interconnected networks C Show icon in notification area when connected 5 The Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window opens the General tab in Windows XP e Ifyou have a dynamic IP address click Obtain an IP address automatically 253 Appendix B Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide e Ifyou have a static IP address click Use the following IP Address and fill in the IP address Subnet mask and Default gateway fields Click Advanced Figure 178 Windows XP Advanced TCP IP Settings Advanced TCP IP Settings CIP Settings DNS WINS Options IP addresses IP address Subnet mask DHCP Enabled Default gateways Gateway Metric Automatic metric 6 If you do not know your gateway s IP address remove any previously installed gateways in t
195. led description of the NAT set for SUA The Prestige also supports Full Feature NAT to map multiple global IP addresses to multiple private LAN IP addresses of clients or servers using mapping types Note 1 Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige 2 Choose Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige 21 2 Applying NAT You apply NAT via menus 4 or 11 3 as displayed next The next figure shows you how to apply NAT for Internet access in menu 4 Enter 4 from the main menu to go to Menu 4 Internet Access Setup Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 162 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 94 Menu 4 Applying NAT for Internet Access Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ISP s Name MyISP Encapsulation RFC 1483 ultiplexing LLC based VPI 8 VCI 35 ATM QoS Type UBR Peak Cell Rate PCR 0 Sustain Cell Rate SCR 0 aximum Burst Size MBS 0 y Login N A y Password N A ENET ENCAP Gateway N A IP Address Assignment Static IP Address 0 0 0 0 Network Address Translation SUA Only Address Mapping Set N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following figure shows how you apply NAT to the remote node in menu 11 1 1 Enter 11 from the main menu 2 When menu 11 appears as shown in the following figure type the number of the remote node that you
196. led information on CI commands Enter 8 from Menu 24 System Maintenance A list of valid commands can be found by typing help or atthe command prompt Type exit to return to the SMT main menu when finished Figure 149 Command Mode in Menu 24 Menu 24 System Maintenance System Status System Information and Console Port Speed Log and Trace Diagnostic Backup Configuration Restore Configuration Upload Firmware Command Interpreter Mode Call Control 0 Time and Date Setting 1 Remote Management PRO WANA UB WNE Enter Menu Selection Number Figure 150 Valid Commands Copyright c 1994 2004 ZyXEL Communications Corp ras gt Valid commands are sys exit device ether wan poe usb ip ppp bridge hdap ras gt Chapter 26 System Maintenance 218 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 26 2 Call Control Support Call Control Support is only applicable when Encapsulation is set to PPPOE in menu 4 or menu 11 1 The budget management function allows you to set a limit on the total outgoing call time of the Prestige within certain times When the total outgoing call time exceeds the limit the current call will be dropped and any future outgoing calls will be blocked To access the call control menu select option 9 in menu 24 to go to Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control as shown in the next table Figure 151 Menu 24 9 System Maintenance Call Control
197. lias No 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 133 Chapter 16 Menu 3 LAN Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Follow the instructions in the following table on how to configure the DHCP fields Table 39 DHCP Ethernet Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION DHCP Setup DHCP If set to Server your Prestige can assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to Windows 95 Windows NT and other systems that support the DHCP client If set to None the DHCP server will be disabled If set to Relay the Prestige acts as a surrogate DHCP server and relays DHCP requests and responses between the remote server and the clients Enter the IP address of the actual remote DHCP server in the Remote DHCP Server in this case When DHCP server is used the following items need to be set Client IP Pool This field specifies the first of the contiguous addresses in the IP address pool Starting Address Size of Client IP Pool This field specifies the size or count of the IP address pool Primary DNS Server Enter the IP addresses of the DNS servers The DNS servers are passed to the Secondary DNS DHCP clients along with the IP address and the subnet mask Server Remote DHCP If Relay is selected in the DHCP field above then enter the IP address of the Serve actual remote DHCP server here Follow the instructions in the following table to configure TCP IP parameters for t
198. ll take precedence over set 3 and 4 and so on You can design up to 12 schedule sets but you can only apply up to four schedule sets for a remote node Note To delete a schedule set enter the set number and press SPACE BAR and then ENTER or delete in the Edit Name field Chapter 29 Call Scheduling 238 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide To setup a schedule set select the schedule set you want to setup from menu 26 1 12 and press ENTER to see Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup as shown next Figure 166 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup Active Yes Start Date yyyy mm dd 2000 01 01 How Often Once Once Date yyyy mm dd 2000 01 01 Weekdays Sunday N A Monday N A Tuesday N A Wednesday N A Thursday N A Friday N A Saturday N A Start Time hh mm 00 00 Duration hh mm 00 00 Action Forced On Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Ifa connection has been already established your Prestige will not drop it Once the connection is dropped manually or it times out then that remote node can t be triggered up until the end ofthe Duration Table 73 Menu 26 1 Schedule Set Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION Active Press SPACE BAR to select Yes or No Choose Yes and press ENTER to activate the schedule set Start Date Enter the start date when you wish the set to take effect in year month date format Valid dates
199. llowing table is a summary for class C subnet planning Table 95 Class C Subnet Planning ipud pri HOST SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS a BER 1 255 255 255 128 25 126 2 255 255 255 192 26 62 3 255 255 255 224 27 30 4 255 255 255 240 28 16 14 5 255 255 255 248 29 32 6 255 255 255 252 30 64 7 255 255 255 254 31 128 1 265 Appendix C Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Subnetting With Class A and Class B Networks For class A and class B addresses the subnet mask also determines which bits are part of the network number and which are part of the host ID A class B address has two host ID octets available for subnetting and a class A address has three host ID octets see Table 83 available for subnetting The following table is a summary for class B subnet planning Table 96 Class B Subnet Planning NO BORROWED HOST NO HOSTS PER BITS SUBNET MASK NO SUBNETS SUBNET 1 255 255 128 0 17 2 32766 2 255 255 192 0 18 4 16382 3 255 255 224 0 19 8 8190 4 255 255 240 0 20 16 4094 5 255 255 248 0 21 32 2046 6 255 255 252 0 22 64 1022 7 255 255 254 0 23 128 510 8 255 255 255 0 24 256 254 9 255 255 255 128 25 512 126 10 255 255 255 192 26 1024 62 11 255 255 255 224 27 2048 30 12 255 255 255 240 28 4096 14 13 255 255 255
200. llowing two conditions This device may not cause harmful interference This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operations This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna ncrease the separation between the equipment and the receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Notice 1 Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment Certifications 1 Go to www zyxel com 2 Select your product from the drop down list box on the ZyXEL home page to go to that product s
201. lock with Time Server now Select this option to have your Prestige use the time server that you configured above to set its internal system clock Please wait for up to 60 seconds while the Prestige locates the time server If the Prestige cannot find the time server please check the time server protocol and its IP address If the IP address was entered correctly try pinging it for example to test the connection Date Current Date This field displays the date of your Prestige Each time you reload this page the Prestige synchronizes the time with the time server New Date yyyy mm dd This field displays the last updated date from the time server When you select None in the Use Protocol when Bootup field enter the new date in this field and then click Apply Time Current Time This field displays the time of your Prestige Each time you reload this page the Prestige synchronizes the time with the time server New Time This field displays the last updated time from the time server When you select None in the Use Protocol when Bootup field enter the new time in this field and then click Apply Apply Click Apply to save your changes back to the Prestige Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh 89 Chapter 9 Time and Date Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 10 Remote Management Configuration This chapter provides informatio
202. logs and trace records that are stored locally The second is the syslog facility for message logging 24 4 1 Viewing Error Log The first place you should look for clues when something goes wrong is the error log Follow the procedures to view the local error trace log 1 Type 24 in the main menu to display Menu 24 System Maintenance 2 From menu 24 type 3 to display Menu 24 3 System Maintenance Log and Trace Figure 137 Menu 24 3 System Maintenance Log and Trace Menu 24 3 System Maintenance Log and Trace 1 View Error Log 2 UNIX Syslog Pleas nter selection 3 Enter from Menu 24 3 System Maintenance Log and Trace to display the error log in the system After the Prestige finishes displaying the error log you will have the option to clear it Samples oftypical error and information messages are presented in the next figure Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis 200 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 138 Sample Error and Information Messages 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 Clear Sat Sat Sat Sat Sat sat Sat Sat Sat Sat Sat Sat v V an an an an an an an an an an an an C Error Log C CX C 9 C CO 2 2 00 00 00 00 00 00 L 00 00 00 00 00 00 y 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 05 2 30 36 03 59 n oooooo00o0000 E20 0000000 c0 oO H NO
203. low the steps below to install the UPnP in Windows XP 1 Click Start and Control Panel 2 Double click Network Connections 3 In the Network Connections window click Advanced in the main menu and select Optional Networking Components Figure 37 Network Connections EN Network Connections Fie Edit View Favorites Tools F Operator Assisted Dialing Dial up Preferences Address r3 Network Connections Network Identification Bridge Connections Network Tasks Advanced Settings Optional Networking Components f l Create a new connection 4 The Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard window displays Select Networking Service in the Components selection box and click Details 97 Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 38 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard Windows Components You can add or remove components of Windows XP To add or remove a component click the checkbox 4 shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components 2 Management and Monitoring Tools M Networking 5 0 3MB O 25 Other Network File and Print Services Description Contains a variety of specialized network related services and protocols Total disk space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 260 9 MB 5 n the
204. ltilanguage Support 0 0 MB Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 856 3 MB Description Includes accessories to help you connect to other computers and online services 5 of 10 components selected Details Have Disk OK Cancel Apply 3 In the Communications window select the Universal Plug and Play check box in the Components selection box Chapter 11 Universal Plug and Play UPnP 96 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 36 Add Remove Programs Windows Setup Communication Components Communications x To install a component select the check box next to the component name or clear the check box if you do not want to install it amp shaded box means that only part of the component will be installed To see what s included in a component click Details Components GE NetMeeting amp Phone Dialer 0 2MB Universal Plug and Play 0 4 MB 3 Virtual Private Networking 0 0 MB E Space used by installed components 42 4 MB Space required 0 0 MB Space available on disk 856 3 MB Description Universal Plug and Play enables seamless connectivity and communication between Windows and intelligent appliances Details 4 Click OK to go back to the Add Remove Programs Properties window and click Next 5 Restart the computer when prompted Installing UPnP in Windows XP Fol
205. m as opposed to an IP packet You specify the portion of the packet to check with the Offset from 0 and the Length fields both in bytes The Prestige applies the Mask bit wise ANDing to the data portion before comparing the result against the Value to determine a match The Mask and Value fields are specified in hexadecimal numbers Note that it takes two hexadecimal digits to represent a byte so if the length is 4 the value in either field will take 8 digits for example FFFFFFFF 185 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide To configure a generic rule select an empty filter set in menu 21 for example 5 Select Generic Filter Rule in the Filter Type field and press ENTER to open Menu 21 5 1 Generic Filter Rule as shown in the following figure Figure 123 Menu 21 5 1 Generic Filter Rule Menu 21 5 1 Generic Filter Rule Filter 5 1 Filter Type Generic Filter Rule Active No Offset 0 Length 0 Mask N A Value N A More No Log None Action Matched Check Next Rul Action Not Matched Check xt Rul Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The next table describes the fields in the Generic Filter Rule menu Table 56 Menu 21 1 5 1 Generic Filter Rule FIELD DESCRIPTION Filter This is the filter set filter rule coordinates for instance 2 3 refers to the second filter set and the third rule of that set Fil
206. must set the IP addresses and the subnet masks of a computer and the Prestige to be in the same subnet to allow the computer to access the Internet through the Prestige In cases where your computer is required to use a static IP address in another network you may need to manually configure the network settings of the computer every time you want to access the Internet via the Prestige With the Any IP feature and NAT enabled the Prestige allows a computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings such as IP address and subnet mask of the computer when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet Whether a computer is set to use a dynamic or static fixed IP address you can simply connect the computer to the Prestige and access the Internet The following figure depicts a scenario where a computer is set to use a static private IP address in the corporate environment In a residential house where a Prestige is installed you can still use the computer to access the Internet without changing the network settings even when the IP addresses of the computer and the Prestige are not in the same subnet 59 Chapter 5 LAN Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 16 Any IP Example E S EE Internet 192 168 10 1 m GW E GER Na Internet 3 192 168 10 1 192 168 1 1 j The Any IP feature does not apply to a computer using either a dynamic IP address or a static IP add
207. n Specifies whether action should be taken on criteria Matched or Not Matched Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 72 Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Gateway addr Defines the outgoing gateway address The gateway Must be on the same subnet as the Prestige if it is on the LAN otherwise the gateway must be the IP address of a remote node The default gateway is specified as 0 0 0 0 Type of Service Set the new TOS value of the outgoing packet Prioritize incoming network traffic by choosing No Change Normal Min Delay Max Thruput Max Reliable or Min Cost Precedence Set the new outgoing packet precedence value Values are 0 to 7 or No Change Log Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Yes to make an entry in the system log when a policy is executed When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 28 5 Applying an IP Policy This section shows you where to apply the IP policies after you design them 28 5 1 Ethernet IP Policies From Menu 3 Ethernet Setup type 2 to go to Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup You can choose up to four IP policy sets from 12 by typing their numbers separated by commas for example 2 4 7 9 Chapter 28 IP
208. n on configuring remote management 10 1 Remote Management Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services protocols can access which Prestige interface if any from which computers You may manage your Prestige from a remote location via Internet WAN only ALL LAN and WAN LAN only Neither Disable To disable remote management of a service select Disable in the corresponding Server Access field You may only have one remote management session running at a time The Prestige automatically disconnects a remote management session of lower priority when another remote management session of higher priority starts The priorities for the different types of remote management sessions are as follows 1 Telnet 2 HTTP 10 1 1 Remote Management Limitations Remote management over LAN or WAN will not work when A filter in SMT menu 3 1 LAN or in menu 11 5 WAN is applied to block a Telnet FTP or Web service You have disabled that service in one of the remote management screens The IP address in the Secured Client IP field does not match the client IP address If it does not match the Prestige will disconnect the session immediately There is already another remote management session with an equal or higher priority running You may only have one remote management session running at one time Chapter 10 Remote Management Configuration 90 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 1
209. n the last second Rx B s This field displays the number of bytes received in the last second Up Time This field displays the elapsed time this port has been up Collisions This is the number of collisions on this port Poll Interval s Type the time interval for the browser to refresh system statistics Set Interval Click this button to apply the new poll interval you entered in the Poll Interval field above Stop Click this button to halt the refreshing of the system statistics 12 3 DHCP Table Screen DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Prestige as a DHCP server or disable it When configured as a server the Prestige provides the TCP IP configuration for the clients If set to None DHCP service will be disabled and you must have another DHCP server on your LAN or else the computer must be manually configured Click Maintenance and then the DHCP Table tab Read only information here relates to your DHCP status The DHCP table shows current DHCP Client information including IP Address Host Name and MAC Address of all network clients using the DHCP server 111 Chapter 12 Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 51 DHCP Table DHCP Table IP Address MAC Address 192 168 1 33 00 00 E8 7C 14 80 The following table describes the fields i
210. n this screen Table 27 DHCP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION Host Name This is the name of the host computer IP Address This field displays the IP address relative to the Host Name field MAC Address This field displays the MAC Media Access Control address of the computer with the displayed host name Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC address The MAC address is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 12 4 Any IP Table Screen Click Maintenance Any IP The Any IP table shows current read only information including the IP address and the MAC address of all network devices that use the Any IP feature to communicate with the Prestige Refer to the Any IP section for more information Figure 52 Any IP Table Any IP Table En IP Address MAC Address 1 192 168 10 1 00 50 ba ad 4f 81 Refresh The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 28 Any IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION This field displays the index number IP Address This field displays the IP address of the network device Chapter 12 Maintenance 112 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 28 Any IP Table LABEL DESCRIPTION MAC Address This field displays the MAC Media Access Control address of the computer with the displayed IP address Every Ethernet device has a unique MAC address The MAC addres
211. ndows 2000 and Windows XP Traffic Redirect Traffic redirect forwards WAN traffic to a backup gateway when the Prestige cannot connect to the Internet thus acting as an auxiliary if your regular WAN connection fails Universal Plug and Play UPnP Using the standard TCP IP protocol the Prestige and other UPnP enabled devices can dynamically join a network obtain an IP address and convey its capabilities to other devices on the network 31 Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide PPPOE Support RFC2516 PPPOE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet emulates a dial up connection It allows your ISP to use their existing network configuration with newer broadband technologies such as ADSL The PPPOE driver on the Prestige is transparent to the computers on the LAN which see only Ethernet and are not aware of PPPOE thus saving you from having to manage PPPoE clients on individual computers Network Address Translation NAT Network Address Translation NAT allows the translation of an Internet protocol address used within one network for example a private IP address used in a local network to a different IP address known within another network for example a public IP address used on the Internet 10 100M Auto negotiating Ethernet Fast Ethernet Interface s This auto negotiation feature allows the Prestige to detect the speed of incoming transmissions and adjust appropriately without
212. ne Disable Dial On Demand means that this schedule prevents a demand call on the line When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENT ER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Once your schedule sets are configured you must then apply them to the desired remote node s Enter 11 from the Main Menu and then enter the target remote node index Using SPACE BAR select PPPoE or PPPOA in the Encapsulation field and then press ENTER to make the schedule sets field available as shown next Figure 167 Applying Schedule Set s to a Remote Node PPPoE Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name MyISP Route IP Active Yes Bridge No Encapsulation PPPoA Edit IP Bridge No ultiplexing LLC based Edit ATM Options No Service Name N A Edit Advance Options N A Incoming Telco Option Rem Login Allocated Budget min 0 Rem Password Period hr 0 Outgoing Schedules Sets 1 2 3 4 My Login ChangeMe Nailed Up Connection No My Password x Session Options Authen CHAP PAP Edit Filter Sets No Idle Timeout sec 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel You can apply up to four schedule sets separated by commas for one remote node Change the schedule set numbers to your preference s Chapter 29 Call Scheduling 240 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s
213. ne Check WAN IP Address Metric This field sets this route s priority among the routes the Prestige uses The metric represents the cost of transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost Backup Gateway Type the IP address of your backup gateway in dotted decimal notation The Prestige automatically forwards traffic to this IP address if the Prestige s Internet connection terminates Back Click Back to return to the previous screen Apply Click Apply to save the changes Cancel Click Cancel to begin configuring this screen afresh Chapter 6 WAN Setup 72 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 73 Chapter 6 WAN Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens This chapter discusses how to configure NAT on the Prestige 7 1 NAT Overview NAT Network Address Translation NAT RFC 1631 is the translation of the IP address of a host in a packet for example the source address of an outgoing packet used within one network to a different IP address known within another network 7 1 1 NAT Definitions Inside outside denotes where a host
214. nection up all the time and specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field Chapter 6 WAN Setup 68 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 12 WAN Setup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Max Idle Timeout Specify an idle time out in the Max Idle Timeout field when you select Connect on Demand The default setting is 0 which means the Internet session will not timeout PPPOE Passthrough PPPoE encapsulation only This field is available when you select PPPoE encapsulation In addition to the Prestige s built in PPPoE client you can enable PPPoE pass through to allow up to ten hosts on the LAN to use PPPoE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP via the Prestige Each host can have a separate account and a public WAN IP address PPPoE pass through is an alternative to NAT for application where NAT is not appropriate Disable PPPoE pass through if you do not need to allow hosts on the LAN to use PPPOE client software on their computers to connect to the ISP Subnet Mask ENET ENCAP encapsulation only Enter a subnet mask in dotted decimal notation Refer to Appendix C IP Subnetting in the to calculate a subnet mask If you are implementing subnetting ENET ENCAP Gateway ENET ENCAP encapsulation only You must specify a gateway IP address supplied by your ISP when you select ENET ENCAP in the Encapsulation field Zero Configuration This feature
215. network consists of two main components agents and a manager An agent is a management software module that resides in a managed device the Prestige An agent translates the local management information from the managed device into a form compatible with SNMP The manager is the console through which network administrators perform network management functions It executes applications that control and monitor managed devices Chapter 23 SNMP Configuration 192 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The managed devices contain object variables managed objects that define each piece of information to be collected about a device Examples of variables include the number of packets received node port status etc A Management Information Base MIB is a collection of managed objects SNMP allows a manager and agents to communicate for the purpose of accessing these objects SNMP itself is a simple request response protocol based on the manager agent model The manager issues a request and the agent returns responses using the following protocol operations Get Allows the manager to retrieve an object variable from the agent GetNext Allows the manager to retrieve the next object variable from a table or list within an agent In SNMPv1 when a manager wants to retrieve all elements of a table from an agent it initiates a Get operation followed by a series of GetNext operations Set Allows the manager to set values for object
216. network using another policy See the next figure 233 Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Route 1 represents the default IP route and route 2 represents the configured IP route Figure 161 Example of IP Policy Routing B _ Web Fa MN m ar Internet N WAN M 192 168 1 1 BE um A E VM a FTP X LAN ite AN E V WAN PS Pa 4 A WAN Router 192 168 1 100 To force packets coming from clients with IP addresses of 192 168 1 33 to 192 168 1 64 to be routed to the Internet via the WAN port ofthe Prestige follow the steps as shown next 1 Create a routing policy set in menu 25 2 Create a rule for this set in Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy as shown next Figure 162 IP Routing Policy Example 1 Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy Policy Set Name setl Active Yes Criteria IP Protocol 6 Type of Service Don t Care Precedenc Don t Care Source addr start 192 168 1 33 Packet length 10 Len Comp N A end 192 168 1 64 port start 0 end N A Destination addr start 0 0 0 0 end N A port start 80 end 80 Action Matched Gateway addr 192 168 1 1 Log No Type of Service No Change Precedenc Press No Change ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing 234 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 163 3 Check Menu 25 1 IP Rout
217. nnennnnnnnnnnnnennannnnnnnnnnn ennen 256 Figure 181 Macintosh 2 EFF en EA 256 Figure 182 Macintosh OS X Apple Men sense ae 257 Figure 183 Macintosh OS AX NetWork zei since ak aisi RER Annan hen add 258 Figure 184 Single Computer per Router Hardware Configuration nennen 269 Figure 185 Prestige as a PPPoE Client en a dear den 269 Figure 186 Virtual EICH Topology anne 270 20 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 21 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide List of Tables Tohe ADSL Standards shoes E 30 Table 2 Front Panel LED DESCHDUCGI ai 36 Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary unnanunnnaenenrvnnndnenenrnnntenvensnnntannennnnndeenn 40 Table 4 Internet Access Wizard Setup First Screen nnen nnee venennennenenenenrennenn 44 Table 5 Internet Connection with PPPOE aussen sinless 47 Table 6 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 nnnnnnnnnneen nennen venen enenenenenne rennen 48 Table 7 Internet Connection with ENED ENGAP san 49 Table 8 Internet Connection With PPPOA aussen anna 50 Table 9 Internet Access Wizard Setup LAN Configuration nennen eren 52 Table 10 PASSWORD m 54 IE ONE S Eric reelle 61 Table Te WAN SED user 67 Table TF WAN BACKUP A 71 RE NAT TUS MEE T UU T Ade sg la 74 Table 15 NAT Mapping TYPES aneinander 77 Table 16 Services and Porn Numbers ans ana herh 78 Table wrist 80 Table 16 Edit SUANAT Server Set urn 81 Table 19 Address Map
218. nostic Genaral SEN serenades 113 12 5 2 Diagnostic DSL Line BELGEN ana au 114 120 Firmware SOREN nn 116 Chapter 13 introducing the SMT une ee nenn ha ah nr 118 EAR Ile ae I E mna ded san senden ke 118 13 1 1 Procedure for SMT Configuration via Telnet u s nn 118 13 12 Entering Password sen aaa 118 13 1 3 Prestige SMT Menu Overview nnsarnnnnenenensenereerennnrennen vanden 119 13 2 Navigating he SMT Interface ce 119 13 2 1 System Management Terminal Interface Summary 121 13 3 Changing the System Password ersehen aan 122 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Chapter 14 Menu 1 General Setup 000mm AKEL 124 TE BEREITEN ua eiie derne eds eb but eimi rta belii oee el 124 14 2 Procedure To Configure MENU T i se croceo trt generator anna euren 124 14 2 1 Procedure to Configure Dynamic DNS eese 125 Chapter 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup aa err per nen ino rhum run IRE nA en FER rra ian En FE ra Ee rS 128 15 1 Introduction to WAN Backup SetuP una 128 15 2 Configuring Dial Backup in Menu 2 aueh bons rtt e tin 128 15 2 1 Dame RAS well 2a esae eir ae 129 Chapter 16 Menu 3 LAN SSU nu 132 18 1 LAN SEN Mr 132 18 1 1 General Ethernet Setup nina een 132 16 2 Protocol Dependent Ethernet Setup auuuuannsenenn 133 16 3 CPP Ethernet Setup and DHCP ass san mix modden 133 Chapter 17 Od Re CS OTE 136 17 1 Internet Access Vene ae kn 136
219. nreachable 4 A packet that needed fragmentation was dropped because it was set to Don t Fragment DF 5 Source route failed 4 Source Quench 0 A gateway may discard internet datagrams if it does not have the buffer space needed to queue the datagrams for output to the next network on the route to the destination network 5 Redirect 0 Redirect datagrams for the Network Appendix G 276 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 103 ICMP Notes continued TYPE CODE DESCRIPTION 1 Redirect datagrams for the Host 2 Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Network 3 Redirect datagrams for the Type of Service and Host 8 Echo 0 Echo message 11 Time Exceeded 0 Time to live exceeded in transit 1 Fragment reassembly time exceeded 12 Parameter Problem 0 Pointer indicates the error 13 Timestamp 0 Timestamp request message 14 Timestamp Reply 0 Timestamp reply message 15 Information Request 0 Information request message 16 Information Reply 0 Information reply message Table 104 Syslog Logs LOG MESSAGE DESCRIPTION lt Facility 8 Severity gt Mon dd hr mm ss hostname src lt srcIP srcPort gt dst lt dstIP dstPort gt msg lt msg gt note lt note gt devID lt mac address last three numbers gt cat lt category gt This message is sent by the system RAS displays as the system name if you haven t conf
220. ntilated housing minimizes space requirements making it easy to position anywhere in your busy office 1 1 2 Applications for the Prestige Here are some example uses for which the Prestige is well suited 1 1 2 1 Internet Access The Prestige is the ideal high speed Internet access solution Your Prestige supports the TCP IP protocol which the Internet uses exclusively It is compatible with all major ADSL DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer providers A DSLAM is a rack of ADSL line cards with data multiplexed into a backbone network interface connection for example T1 OC3 DS3 ATM or Frame Relay Think of it as the equivalent of a modem rack for ADSL A typical Internet access application is shown below Figure 1 Prestige Internet Access Application LAN M Internet eeenssesesesene Internet Single User Account For a SOHO Small Office Home Office environment your Prestige offers the Single User Account SUA feature that allows multiple users on the LAN Local Area Network to access the Internet concurrently for the cost of a single IP address 1 1 2 2 LAN to LAN Application You can use the Prestige to connect two geographically dispersed networks over the ADSL line A typical LAN to LAN application for your Prestige is shown as follows 35 Chapter 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 2 Prestige LAN to LAN Application LAN 1 m a lm 1 1 3
221. o create the mapping table used to assign global addresses to computers on the LAN Set 255 is used for SUA When you select Full Feature in menu 4 or 11 3 the SMT will use Set 1 When you select SUA Only the SMT will use the pre configured Set 255 read only The server set is a list of LAN servers mapped to external ports To use this set a server rule must be set up inside the NAT address mapping set Please see the section on port forwarding in the chapter on NAT web configurator screens for further information on these menus To configure NAT enter 15 from the main menu to bring up the following screen Figure 96 Menu 15 NAT Setup Menu 15 NAT Setup 1 Address Mapping Sets 2 NAT Server Sets Enter Menu Selection Number 21 3 1 Address Mapping Sets Enter 1 to bring up Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 164 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 97 Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets 1 ACL Default Set 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 255 SUA read only Enter Menu Selection Number 21 3 1 1 SUA Address Mapping Set Enter 255 to display the next screen see also the SUA Single User Account Versus NAT section The fields in this menu cannot be changed Figure 98 Menu 15 1 255 SUA Address Mapping Rules Menu 15 1 255 Address Mapping Rules Set Name SUA Idx Local Start IP Local
222. o filter A 0 0 0 0 field is ignored IP Mask Type the IP mask to apply to the Source IP Addr field 183 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 55 Menu 21 x 1 TCP IP Filter Rule continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Port Type the source port of the packets you want to filter The range of this field is 0 to 65535 A 0 field is ignored Port Comp Select the comparison to apply to the source port in the packet against the value given in Source Port field Choices are None Less Greater Equal or Not Equal TCP Estab This applies only when the IP Protocol field is 6 TCP If Yes the rule matches packets that want to establish TCP connection s SYN 1 and ACK 0 else it is ignored More If Yes a matching packet is passed to the next filter rule before an action is taken or else the packet is disposed of according to the action fields If More is Yes then Action Matched and Action Not Matched will be N A Log Select the logging option from the following None No packets will be logged Action Matched Only packets that match the rule parameters will be logged Action Not Matched Only packets that do not match the rule parameters will be logged Both All packets will be logged Action Matched Select the action for a matching packet Choices are Check Next Rule Forward or Drop Action Not Matched Select the action for a packe
223. o obtain the services of this warranty contact ZyXEL s Service Center for your Return Material Authorization number RMA Products must be returned Postage Prepaid It is recommended that the unit be insured when shipped Any returned products without proof of purchase or those with an out dated warranty will be repaired or replaced at the discretion of ZyXEL and the customer will be billed for parts and labor All repaired or replaced products will be shipped by ZyXEL to the corresponding return address Postage Paid This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may also have other rights that vary from country to country Safety Warnings 1 To reduce the risk of fire use only No 26 AWG or larger telephone wire 2 Do not use this product near water for example in a wet basement or near a swimming pool 3 Avoid using this product during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightening ZyXEL Limited Warranty 4 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Customer Support Please have the following information ready when you contact customer support Product model and serial number Warranty Information Date that you received your device Brief description of the problem and the steps you took to solve it METHOD SUPPORT E MAIL TELEPHONE WEB SITE REGULAR MAIL LOCATION SALES E MAIL FAX FTP SITE support zyxel com tw 8
224. ode field A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Click Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP address otherwise click Static IP Address and type your ISP assigned IP address in the IP Address text box below Connection Select Connect on Demand when you don t want the connection up all the time and specify an idle time out in seconds in the Max Idle Timeout field The default setting selects Connection on Demand with 0 as the idle time out which means the Internet session will not timeout Select Nailed Up Connection when you want your connection up all the time The Prestige will try to bring up the connection automatically if it is disconnected The schedule rule s in SMT menu 26 has priority over your Connection settings Network Address Translation This option is available if you select Routing in the Mode field Select None SUA Only or Full Feature from the drop sown list box Refer to Chapter 7 on page 74 for more details Back Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen Next Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen 3 2 5 DHCP Setup DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol RFC 2131 and RFC 2132 allows individual clients to obtain TCP IP configuration at start up from a server You can configure the Prestige as a DHCP serv
225. of the configuration file on the Prestige to the file destination on the computer and renames it config rom 25 2 8 GUI based TFTP Clients The following table describes some of the fields that you may see in GUI based TFTP clients Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 210 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 67 General Commands for GUI based TFTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Enter the IP address of the Prestige 192 168 1 1 is the Prestige s default IP address when shipped Send Fetch Use Send to upload the file to the Prestige and Fetch to back up the file on your computer Local File Enter the path and name of the firmware file bin extension or configuration file rom extension on your computer Remote File This is the filename on the Prestige The filename for the firmware is ras and for the configuration file is rom 0 Binary Transfer the file in binary mode Abort Stop transfer of the file Refer to the TFTP and FTP over WAN Management Limitations section to read about configurations that disallow TFTP and FTP over WAN 25 3 Restore Configuration This section shows you how to restore a previously saved configuration Note that this function erases the current configuration before restoring a previous back up configuration please do not attempt to restore unless you have a backup configuration file stored on di
226. of your TFTP client program For UNIX use get to transfer from the Prestige to the computer put the other way around and binary to set binary transfer mode 215 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 25 4 6 TFTP Upload Command Example The following is an example TFTP command tftp i host put firmware bin ras where i specifies binary image transfer mode use this mode when transferring binary files host is the Prestige s IP address and put transfers the file source on the computer firmware bin name of the firmware on the computer to the file destination on the remote host ras name of the firmware on the Prestige Commands that you may see in GUI based TFTP clients are listed earlier in this chapter Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 216 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 217 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 26 System Maintenance This chapter leads you through SMT menus 24 8 to 24 10 26 1 Command Interpreter Mode The Command Interpreter CI is a part of the main system firmware The CI provides much of the same functionality as the SMT while adding some low level setup and diagnostic functions Enter the CI from the SMT by selecting menu 24 8 See the included disk or the zyxel com web site for more detai
227. olicy Routing na SEALs 228 2o ROUNE POCI neuere 228 204 IP Routing Policy SETUP irere de Abe iEn E A Eder i 229 285 plu cB een 232 22 3 1 Elnemet IP Pelle TI TIE 232 28 6 IP Policy Routing Example ana ana IEA ale 233 Chapter 29 Ball Se NEG TUDIN UIT I 238 ZI DIENT een 238 Chapter 30 Troubleshooting anche 242 30 1 Problems Starting Up the Prestige ionic eicere nennen 242 30 2 Problemes with he LAN LED nenne 242 30 3 Problems with the DSL BED nasse 243 30 4 Problems with the LAN Interface ke en beds 243 30 5 Problems with the WAN Interface sssssssssssssssseeeneeenenenen 243 20 6 Problems with Internet Attest are 244 13 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 30 7 Problems with the Password 25 ra skr esta 244 30 8 Problems with the Web Configurator ennn ser senensensnsenenennnnnenen nennen 245 30 9 Problems with Remote Management cesserit 245 Appendix A Splitters and Microfilters u een 246 Oane ine FOTS SPIO ee 246 Telephone KIENS ana 246 Prestige Wil ISDN Pe aan aha aaa anna han ara 247 Appendix B Setting up Your Computer s IP Address suser 248 VAE SSD BIN adresse i Se pat BE PAPERS pr HORE ede E A CH SR ORE RH FERIAS od 248 instal Cen NIE ANG fem 249 ME ge eee eas ea Sorel A 250 MENDA SUVS en 251 indes ZONDA croci ele dere elle berede dede eler 251 VEN SEINE TD TO IT 255 dur ene S ES edad tu rT reer 255 Verlag Selle une 257 RABEN EEN OS een 257 FEIN SER nen 258 Appendix
228. on NAT Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 22 Filter Configuration This chapter shows you how to create and apply filters 22 1 About Filtering Your Prestige uses filters to decide whether or not to allow passage of a data packet and or to make a call There are two types of filter applications data filtering and call filtering Filters are subdivided into device and protocol filters which are discussed later Data filtering screens data to determine if the packet should be allowed to pass Data filters are divided into incoming and outgoing filters depending on the direction of the packet relative to a port Data filtering can be applied on either the WAN side or the Ethernet side Call filtering is used to determine if a packet should be allowed to trigger a call Outgoing packets must undergo data filtering before they encounter call filtering Call filters are divided into two groups the built in call filters and user defined call filters Your Prestige has built in call filters that prevent administrative for example RIP packets from triggering calls These filters are always enabled and not accessible to you Your Prestige applies the built in filters first and then the user defined call filters if applicable as shown next Figure 116 Outgoing Packet Filtering Process Call Filtering Active Data Built in User defined default Call Filters Call Filters if applicable Initiat
229. on select Disable DNS Ifyou know your DNS information select Enable DNS and type the information in the fields below you may not need to fill them all in Appendix B 250 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 173 Windows 95 98 Me TCP IP Properties DNS Configuration TCP IP Properties 2 2 x Bindings Advanced Nepos DNS Configuration Gateway WINS Configuration IP Address Domain Suffix Search Order Cancel 4 Click the Gateway tab e If you do not know your gateway s IP address remove previously installed gateways e Ifyou have a gateway IP address type it in the New gateway field and click Add 5 Click OK to save and close the TCP IP Properties window 6 Click OK to close the Network window Insert the Windows CD if prompted 7 Turn on your Prestige and restart your computer when prompted Verifying Settings 1 Click Start and then Run 2 In the Run window type winipcfg and then click OK to open the IP Configuration window 3 Select your network adapter You should see your computer s IP address subnet mask and default gateway Windows 2000 NT XP 1 For Windows XP click start Control Panel In Windows 2000 NT click Start Settings Control Panel 251 Appendix B Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 174 Windows XP Start Menu 5 Internet Explorer My Documents esi Outlook Express Y Paint Files and Settings Transfer W
230. on files You can upload configuration files by following the procedure in the Backup Configuration section or by following the instructions in Menu 24 7 2 System Maintenance Upload System Configuration File Note Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may permanently damage your Prestige 25 4 1 Firmware File Upload FTP is the preferred method for uploading the firmware and configuration To use this feature your computer must have an FTP client When you telnet into the Prestige you will see the following screens for uploading firmware and the configuration file using FTP Figure 146 Telnet Into Menu 24 7 1 Upload System Firmware Menu 24 7 1 System Maintenance Upload System Firmware To upload the system firmware follow the procedure below 1 Launch the FTP client on your workstation 2 Type open and the IP address of your system Then type root and SMT password as requested 3 Type put firmware filename ras where firmwarefilename is the name of your firmware upgrade file on your workstation and ras is the remote file name on the systen 4 The system reboots automatically after a successful firmware upload For details on FTP commands please consult the documentation of your FTP client program For details on uploading system firmware using TFTP note that you must remain on this menu to upload system firmware using TFTP please see your manual Press ENTER to Exi
231. ons of UNIX LINUX include the software components you need to install and use TCP IP on your computer Windows 3 1 requires the purchase of a third party TCP IP application package TCP IP should already be installed on computers using Windows NT 2000 XP Macintosh OS 7 and later operating systems After the appropriate TCP IP components are installed configure the TCP IP settings in order to communicate with your network If you manually assign IP information instead of using dynamic assignment make sure that your computers have IP addresses that place them in the same subnet as the Prestige s LAN port Windows 95 98 Me Click Start Settings Control Panel and double click the Network icon to open the Network window Appendix B 248 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 171 Windows 95 98 Me Network Configuration Network LPR for TCP IP Printing 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 3C905B TX Dial Up Adapter USB Fast Ethernet Adapter Y TCP IP gt 3Com EtherLink 10 100 PCI TX NIC 3C9 for Microsoft Networks iG Installing Components The Network window Configuration tab displays a list of installed components You need a network adapter the TCP IP protocol and Client for Microsoft Networks If you need the adapter 1 In the Network window click Add 2 Select Adapter and then click Add 3 Select the manufacturer and model of your network adapter and then click OK If you need TCP IP 1
232. or ESC to Cancel Fill in the required fields Refer to the table shown next for more information about these fields Table 35 Menu 1 General Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION System Name Choose a descriptive name for identification purposes This name can be up to 30 alphanumeric characters long Spaces are not allowed but dashes and underscores are accepted Location optional Enter the geographic location up to 31 characters of your Prestige Contact Person s Enter the name up to 30 characters of the person in charge of this Prestige Name optional Domain Name Enter the domain name if you know it here If you leave this field blank the ISP may assign a domain name via DHCP You can go to menu 24 8 and type sys domainname to see the current domain name used by your gateway If you want to clear this field just press the SPACE BAR The domain name entered by you is given priority over the ISP assigned domain name Edit Dynamic DNS Press the SPACE BAR to select Yes or No default Select Yes to configure Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS discussed next Route IP Set this field to Yes to enable or No to disable IP routing You must enable IP routing for Internet access Bridge Turn on off bridging for protocols not supported for example SNA or not turned on in the previous Route IP field Select Yes to turn bridging on select No to turn bridging off When y
233. ort DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol allows the individual clients computers to obtain the TCP IP configuration at start up from a centralized DHCP server The Prestige has built in DHCP server capability enabled by default It can assign IP addresses an IP default gateway and DNS servers to DHCP clients The Prestige can now also act as a surrogate DHCP server DHCP Relay where it relays IP address assignment from the actual real DHCP server to the clients IP Alias IP Alias allows you to partition a physical network into logical networks over the same Ethernet interface The Prestige supports three logical LAN interfaces via its single physical Ethernet interface with the Prestige itself as the gateway for each LAN network IP Policy Routing IPPR Traditionally routing is based on the destination address only and the router takes the shortest path to forward a packet IP Policy Routing IPPR provides a mechanism to override the default routing behavior and alter the packet forwarding based on the policy defined by the network administrator PPP Point to Point Protocol link layer protocol Transparent bridging for unsupported network layer protocols RIP VRIP II IGMP Proxy ICMP support ATM QoS support MIB II support RFC 1213 Networking Compatibility Your Prestige is compatible with the major ADSL DSLAM Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer providers making configuration as simple as possible for you
234. oth local and global IP addresses 3 Map the other outgoing LAN traffic to IGA3 Many 1 mapping 4 You also map your third IGA to the web server and mail server on the LAN Type Server allows you to specify multiple servers of different types to other computers behind NAT on the LAN The example situation looks somewhat like this Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 172 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 108 NAT Example 3 LAN Mapping Rules 1 FTP 1 lt gt IGA 1 Type 1 1 EI 2 FTP 2 IGA 2 Type 1 1 3 Other LAN traffic IGA 3 Type M 1 Outgoing Traffic Web Server 192 168 1 21 ws Er r i i nn 3 4 IGA 3 gt Inside web server and mail server Incoming Traffic lt Internet gt 10 132 50 1 IGA1 10 132 50 2 IGA2 10 132 50 3 IGA 3 z Mall Server 192 168 1 20 a mi FTP Server 1 192 168 1 10 FTP Server 2 192 168 1 11 ENT In this case you need to configure Address Mapping Set 1 from Menu 15 1 Address Mapping Sets Therefore you must choose the Full Feature option from the Network Address Translation field in menu 4 or menu 11 3 in Figure 109 1 Enter 15 from the main menu 2 Enter 1 to configure the Address Mapping Sets 3 Enter 1 to begin configuring this new set Enter a Set Name choose the Edit Action and then enter 1 for the Select Rule field Press ENTER to confirm 4 Select Type as One to One direct map
235. otiated protocol is different from that in the user profile even when the negotiated protocol is stronger than specified If the peer disconnects right after a successful authentication make sure that you specify the correct authentication protocol when connecting to such an implementation 145 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 18 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options For the TCP IP parameters perform the following steps to edit Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options as shown next 1 In menu 11 1 make sure IP is among the protocols in the Route field 2 Move the cursor to the Edit IP Bridge field press SPACE BAR to select Yes then press ENTER to display Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Figure 75 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options Bridge Options IP Address Assignment Static Ethernet Addr Timeout min N A Rem IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Rem Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 y WAN Addr 0 0 0 0 AT SUA Only Address Mapping Set N A etric 2 Private No RIP Direction None Version RIP 1 ulticast None IP Policies Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL The next table explains fields in Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Table 44 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options FIELD DESCRIPTION IP Address Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER
236. ou have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 14 2 1 Procedure to Configure Dynamic DNS D gt Note If you have a private WAN IP address then you cannot use dynamic DNS 125 Chapter 14 Menu 1 General Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide To configure dynamic DNS go to Menu 1 General Setup and select Yes in the Edit Dynamic DNS field Press ENTER to display Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS as shown next Figure 62 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS Service Provider WWW DynDNS ORG Active Yes Host me dyndns org EMAIL mail mailserver USER username Password KKKKKKKK Enable Wildcard No Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Follow the instructions in the next table to configure dynamic DNS parameters Table 36 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS FIELD DESCRIPTION Service Provider This is the name of your dynamic DNS service provider Active Press SPACE BAR to select Yes and then press ENTER to make dynamic DNS active Host Enter the domain name assigned to your Prestige by your dynamic DNS provider EMAIL Enter your e mail address User Enter your user name Password Enter the password assigned to you Enable Wildcard Your Prestige supports DYNDNS Wil
237. our minute and second format Current Date New Date This field displays an updated date only when you re enter this menu Enter the new date in year month and day format Time Zone Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to set the time difference between your time zone and Greenwich Mean Time GMT Daylight Saving If you use daylight savings time then choose Yes Start Date If using daylight savings time enter the month and day that it starts on End Date If using daylight savings time enter the month and day that it ends on When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel QI ENTER to Confirm 26 3 1 Resetting the Time Chapter 26 System Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The Prestige resets the time in three instances On leaving menu 24 10 after making changes When the Prestige starts up if there is a timeserver configured in menu 24 10 24 hour intervals after starting Chapter 26 System Maintenance 222 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 223 Chapter 26 System Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 27 Remote Management This chapter covers remote management SMT menu 24 11 27 1 Remote Management Overview Remote management allows you to determine which services protocols can ac
238. oute also called dial backup see the Configuring WAN Backup section For example if the normal route has a metric of 1 and the traffic redirect route has a metric of 2 and dial backup route has a metric of 3 then the normal route acts as the primary default route If the normal route fails to connect to the Internet the Prestige tries the traffic redirect route next In the same manner the Prestige uses the dial backup route if the traffic redirect route also fails If you want the dial backup route to take first priority over the traffic redirect route or even the normal route all you need to do is set the dial backup route s metric to 1 and the others to 2 or greater Note IP Policy Routing overrides the default routing behavior D and takes priority over all of the routes mentioned above see Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing Chapter 6 WAN Setup 64 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 6 3 PPPOE Encapsulation The Prestige supports PPPOE Point to Point Protocol over Ethernet PPPOE is an IETF Draft standard RFC 2516 specifying how a personal computer PC interacts with a broadband modem DSL cable wireless etc connection The PPPOE option is for a dial up connection using PPPOE For the service provider PPPOE offers an access and authentication method that works with existing access control systems for example Radius PPPOE provides a login and authentication method that the existing Microso
239. p Criteria Action LY SASl l 1 1 T 1 T 1 DAs2 2 2 2 2 2 2 5 SP 20 20 DP 20 20 P 6 T NM PR 0 cw 192 168 1 1 T MT PR 0 Enter Policy Rule Number 1 6 to Configure Table 71 Menu 25 1 IP Routing Policy Setup ABBREVIATION MEANING Criterion SA Source IP Address SP Source Port DA Destination IP Address DP Destination Port IP layer 4 protocol number TCP 6 UDP 17 Type of service of incoming packet PR Precedence of incoming packet Action GW Gateway IP address T Outgoing Type of service P Outgoing Precedence Service NM Normal MD Minimum Delay MT Maximum Throughput MR Maximum Reliability MC Minimum Cost Type a number from 1 to 6 to display Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy see the next figure This menu allows you to configure a policy rule Chapter 28 IP Policy Routing 230 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 158 Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy Menu 25 1 1 IP Routing Policy Policy Set Name test Active Yes Criteria IP Protocol 6 Type of Service Normal Packet length 40 Precedenc 0 Len Comp Not Equal Source end 1 1 1 1 end 20 addr start 1 1 1 1 port start 20 Destination addr start 2 2 2 2 end 2 2 2 2 port start 20 end 20 Action Matched Gateway addr 192 168 1 1 Log No Type of Service Max Thruput Precedenc 0 Press ENTE
240. p you identify problems with the DSL line Firmware Use this screen to upload firmware to your Prestige LOGOUT Click this label to exit the web configurator 41 Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 3 Wizard Setup This chapter provides information on the Wizard Setup screens for Internet access in the web configurator 3 1 Introduction Use the Wizard Setup screens to configure your system for Internet access with the information provided by your ISP that you fill in the Internet Account Information table of the Quick Start Guide Your ISP may have already configured some of the fields in the wizard screens for you 3 1 1 Encapsulation Be sure to use the encapsulation method required by your ISP The Prestige supports the following methods 3 1 1 1 ENET ENCAP The MAC Encapsulated Routing Link Protocol ENET ENCAP is only implemented with the IP network protocol IP packets are routed between the Ethernet interface and the WAN interface and then formatted so that they can be understood in a bridged environment For instance it encapsulates routed Ethernet frames into bridged ATM cells ENET ENCAP requires that you specify a gateway IP address in the ENET ENCAP Gateway field in the second wizard screen You can get this information from your ISP 3 1 1 2 PPP over Ethernet PPPoE provides access control and billing functionality in a manner similar to dial up ser
241. page 3 Select the certification you wish to view from this page 3 Federal Communications Commission FCC Interference Statement Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide ZYXEL Limited Warranty ZyXEL warrants to the original end user purchaser that this product is free from any defects in materials or workmanship for a period of up to two years from the date of purchase During the warranty period and upon proof of purchase should the product have indications of failure due to faulty workmanship and or materials ZyXEL will at its discretion repair or replace the defective products or components without charge for either parts or labor and to whatever extent it shall deem necessary to restore the product or components to proper operating condition Any replacement will consist of a new or re manufactured functionally equivalent product of equal value and will be solely at the discretion of ZyXEL This warranty shall not apply if the product is modified misused tampered with damaged by an act of God or subjected to abnormal working conditions Note Repair or replacement as provided under this warranty is the exclusive remedy of the purchaser This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties express or implied including any implied warranty of merchantability or fitness for a particular use or purpose ZyXEL shall in no event be held liable for indirect or consequential damages of any kind of character to the purchaser T
242. ping RUES anne 82 Table 20 Address Mapping Rule Edit sun 84 Tale 21 Bnn D MES rss Baier 87 RE SMEs aussi 89 Table 23 Remote Management p 92 Table 24 Connguridu UPRP ae ee 95 FODRES SEES ER ae 109 Table 26 System Status SHOW SIOllsliOS sen a TI IESU DAO gr dm n Duc HE 112 Table f q deo Aa 112 Table 29 DIGGS Gere MM 114 Table 30 Diagnostic DSL LUNE zer a EDER ae een 115 Table 31 Firmware Upgrade ai 116 Table 32 Navigating the SMT Interface sanne dab 120 Table 35 ONT Main Heil sruron inan A E 121 Table 34 Main Menu SUMMAN connie anne anna na EE 121 Table 35 Menu 1 General Beli eine aaa 125 Table 36 Menu 1 1 Configure Dynamic DNS os arsen E Mendes 126 22 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 37 Menu 2 WAN Backup SSU auskennen 129 Table 38 Men 2 1Traflie Redirect Setup uui EEK aan 130 Table 39 DHCP Ethemet SEND aan 134 Table 40 TCP IP Eihemet SEND sahne 134 Table41 Menu 3 2 1 IP Allas Sellip ass a a 138 Table 42 Menu 4 Internet Access Setup ise rese lb nenn na anne nern 140 Table 43 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile eene th nennt tana 144 Table 44 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options eee 146 Table 45 Menu 11 8 Advance Setup Options sss 153 Table 46 Menu 12 1 1 Edit IP Static Route aan a a 156 Table 47 Remote Node Network Layer Options Bridge Fields _ 444 nen 159 Table 48 Menu 12 3 1 E
243. ping for packets going both ways and enter the local Start IP as 192 168 1 10 the IP address of FTP Server 1 the global Start IP as 10 132 50 1 our first IGA See Figure 110 5 Repeat the previous step for rules 2 to 4 as outlined above When finished menu 15 1 1 should look like as shown in Figure 111 Figure 109 Example 3 Menu 11 3 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options Bridge Options IP Address Assignment Static Ethernet Addr Timeout min 0 Rem IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Rem Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 y WAN Addr 0 0 0 0 NAT Full Feature Address Mapping Set 2 etric 2 Private No RIP Direction Both Version RIP 2B Multicast IGMP v2 IP Policies Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel The following figures show how to configure the first rule 173 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 110 Example 3 Menu 15 1 1 1 Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule Type One to One Local IP Start 192 168 1 10 End N A Global IP Start 10 132 50 1 End N A Server Mapping Set N A Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel Figure 111 Example 3 Final Menu 15 1 1 Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules Set Name Example3 Idx Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP Type 1 192 168 1 10 10 132 50 1 1 1 2 192 168 1 11 10 132 50 2 1 1 3 0 0 0 0 255 255
244. pter 30 Troubleshooting Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 30 6 Problems with Internet Access Table 79 Troubleshooting Internet Access PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION cannot access the Internet Make sure the Prestige is turned on and connected to the network If the DSL LED is off refer to the Problems with the DSL LED section Verify your WAN settings Refer to the chapter on WAN setup web configurator or the section on Internet Access SMT Make sure you entered the correct user name and password If you use PPPOE pass through make sure that bridge is turned on See Chapter 14 Menu 1 General Setup for details Internet connection disconnects Check the schedule rules Refer to Chapter 29 Call Scheduling SMT If you use PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation check the idle time out setting Refer to Chapter 6 WAN Setup web configurator or Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration SMT Contact your ISP 30 7 Problems with the Password Table 80 Troubleshooting the Password PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION I cannot The username is admin The default password is 1234 The Password and access the Username fields are case sensitive Make sure that you enter the correct password Prestige and username using the proper casing If you have changed the password and have now forgotten it you will need to upload the default configuration file Refer to the Resetting the Pre
245. rator screen summary 40 web service 245 X XMODEM protocol 207 Z Zero Configuration Internet Access 31 ZyNOS 207 ZyNOS ZyXEL Network Operating System 206 ZyNOS F W Version 207 ZyXEL Limited Warranty Note 4 285
246. red You don t need to change the subnet mask computed by the Prestige unless you are instructed to do otherwise 3 2 1 IP Address Assignment A static IP is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time The Single User Account feature can be enabled or disabled if you have either a dynamic or static IP However the encapsulation method assigned influences your choices for IP address and ENET ENCAP gateway 3 2 1 1 IP Assignment with PPPoA or PPPoE Encapsulation If you have a dynamic IP then the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable N A If you have a static IP then you only need to fill in the IP Address field and not the ENET ENCAP Gateway field 3 2 1 2 IP Assignment with RFC 1483 Encapsulation In this case the IP Address Assignment must be static with the same requirements for the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as stated above 3 2 1 3 IP Assignment with ENET ENCAP Encapsulation In this case you can have either a static or dynamic IP For a static IP you must fill in all the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields as supplied by your ISP However for a dynamic IP the Prestige acts as a DHCP client on the WAN port and so the IP Address and ENET ENCAP Gateway fields are not applicable N A as the DHCP server assigns them to the Prestige 45 Chapter 3 Wizard Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 3 2 1 4 Private IP Addr
247. ress that is in the same subnet as the Prestige s IP address D Note You must enable NAT SUA to use the Any IP feature on the Prestige 5 5 1 How Any IP Works Address Resolution Protocol ARP is a protocol for mapping an Internet Protocol address IP address to a physical machine address also known as a Media Access Control or MAC address on the local area network IP routing table is defined on IP Ethernet devices the Prestige to decide which hop to use to help forward data along to its specified destination The following lists out the steps taken when a computer tries to access the Internet for the first time through the Prestige 1 When a computer which is in a different subnet first attempts to access the Internet it sends packets to its default gateway which is not the Prestige by looking at the MAC address in its ARP table 2 When the computer cannot locate the default gateway an ARP request is broadcast on the LAN 3 The Prestige receives the ARP request and replies to the computer with its own MAC address 4 The computer updates the MAC address for the default gateway to the ARP table Once the ARP table is updated the computer is able to access the Internet through the Prestige 5 When the Prestige receives packets from the computer it creates an entry in the IP routing table so it can properly forward packets intended for the computer Chapter 5 LAN Setup 60 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Gui
248. rsaumeeecbes 169 Figure 102 Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup eeeeeeie isses kk Rn tha a tata RR RR asa ERR NE 169 Figure 103 Multiple Servers Behind NAT Example nnen ennn nneennne eenen neee ven enneenn 170 Figure UM NAT EADE Mer 170 Figure 105 Menu 4 Internet Access amp NAT Example esee antennae 171 Figure 106 NAT Example 2 qe 171 Figure 107 Menu 15 2 1 Specifying an Inside Server nnn enenneereeenenenrenenenneneenn 172 Fours TOS NATE mpe a 173 Figure 109 Example 3 Menu 113 LS SELDE EEN n iania 173 Figure 110 Example d Menu MEAT res ea 174 Figure TH Example o Final Ment II Tee aN 174 Figure 112 Example 3 Menu 19 8 an 175 Figure TO NAT EIER a eh ENAA ln den 175 Figure 114 Example 4 Menu 15 1 1 1 Address Mapping Rule eenen 176 Figure 115 Example 4 Menu 15 1 1 Address Mapping Rules u44 eenen 176 Figure 118 Outgoing Packet Filtering Process u a 178 Figure 117 Filter Rule Process ae akt mise ea Cot tasas et bl dandas c Eti Haee eo Cpl Meuse i das IEEE DUR 179 Figure 118 Menu 21 Filter Set Configuration 1 ee est nun ba ba nina oh n 180 Figure 119 NetBIOS WAN Filter Rules Summary ocean 180 Figure 120 NetBIOS LAN Filter Rules Summary essent nnne nnne 181 Figure 121 Menu 21 x 1 TEPAP Filter Rule rid a aan 183 Figure 122 Executing en IP PURGE a na crimina orte pen eto se an a 185 18 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s G
249. s IP Alias 2 No IP Address N A IP Subnet Mask N A RIP Direction N A Version N A Incoming protocol filters N A Outgoing protocol filters N A Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL Follow the instructions in the following table to configure IP Alias parameters Table 41 Menu 3 2 1 IP Alias Setup FIELD DESCRIPTION IP Alias Choose Yes to configure the LAN network for the Prestige IP Address Enter the IP address of your Prestige in dotted decimal notation IP Subnet Mask Your Prestige will automatically calculate the subnet mask based on the IP address that you assign Unless you are implementing subnetting use the subnet mask computed by the Prestige Protocol Filters RIP Direction Press SPACE BAR to select the RIP direction Choices are None Both In Only or Out Only Version Press SPACE BAR to select the RIP version Choices are RIP 1 RIP 2B or RIP 2M Incoming Enter the filter set s you wish to apply to the incoming traffic between this node and the Prestige Outgoing Protocol Filters Enter the filter set s you wish to apply to the outgoing traffic between this node and the Prestige When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 17 5 Route IP Setup The first step is to enable the IP routing in Menu 1 Gen
250. s WAN remote node settings WAN Backup Use this screen to configure your traffic redirect properties and WAN backup settings NAT SUA Only Use this screen to configure servers behind the Prestige Full Feature Use this screen to configure network address translation mapping rules Security Use this screen to configure Internet security and apply the predefined filter rules Dynamic DNS Use this screen to set up dynamic DNS Time and Date Use this screen to change your Prestige s time and date Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator 40 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 3 Web Configurator Screens Summary continued LINK SUB LINK FUNCTION Remote Use this screen to configure through which interface s and from Management which IP address es users can use Telnet FTP Web to manage the Prestige UPnP Use this screen to enable UPnP on the Prestige Maintenance System Status This screen contains administrative and system related information DHCP Table This screen displays DHCP Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol related information and is READ ONLY Any IP Table This screen shows current read only information of all network devices that use the Any IP feature to communicate with the Prestige Diagnostic General These screens display information to help you identify problems with the Prestige general connection DSL Line These screens display information to hel
251. s is assigned at the factory and consists of six pairs of hexadecimal characters for example 00 A0 C5 00 00 02 Refresh Click Refresh to update this screen 12 5 Diagnostic Screens These read only screens display information to help you identify problems with the Prestige 12 5 1 Diagnostic General Screen Click Diagnostic and then General to open the screen shown next 113 Chapter 12 Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 53 Diagnostic General Diagnostic General Resolving 192 168 1 33 192 168 1 33 Reply from 192 168 1 33 Reply from 192 168 1 33 Reply from 192 168 1 33 Ping Host Successful TCP IP Address Ping System Reset System The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 29 Diagnostic General LABEL DESCRIPTION TCP IP Type the IP address of a computer that you want to ping in order to test a connection Address Ping Click this button to ping the IP address that you entered Reset System Click this button to reboot the Prestige A warning dialog box is then displayed asking you if you re sure you want to reboot the system Click OK to proceed Click this button to go back to the main Diagnostic screen Back 12 5 2 Diagnostic DSL Line Screen Click Diagnostic and then DSL Line to open the screen shown next Chapter 12 Maintenance 114 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure
252. s remote node for a maximum of 10 minutes every hour then the Allocated Budget is 10 minutes and the Period hr is 1 hour Schedule Sets This field is only applicable for PPPoE and PPPoA encapsulation You can apply up to four schedule sets here For more details please refer to Chapter 29 Call Scheduling Nailed up Connection This field is only applicable for PPPoE and PPPoA encapsulation This field specifies if you want to make the connection to this remote node a nailed up connection More details are given earlier in this section Session Options Edit Filter Sets Use SPACE BAR to choose Yes and press ENTER to open menu 11 5 to edit the filter sets See the Remote Node Filter section for more details Idie Timeout sec Type the number of seconds 0 9999 that can elapse when the Prestige is idle there is no traffic going to the remote node before the Prestige automatically disconnects the remote node 0 means that the session will not timeout When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 18 2 3 Outgoing Authentication Protocol For obvious reasons you should employ the strongest authentication protocol possible However some vendors implementation includes specific authentication protocol in the user profile It will disconnect ifthe neg
253. ser s Guide Figure 26 NAT Mode NAT Mode Network Address Translation C None SUA Only Edit Details C Full Feature Edit Details The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 17 NAT Mode LABEL DESCRIPTION None Select this radio button to disable NAT SUA Only Select this radio button if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige The Prestige uses Address Mapping Set 1 in the NAT Edit SUA NAT Server Set screen Edit Details Click this link to go to the NAT Edit SUA NAT Server Set screen Full Feature Select this radio button if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige Edit Details Click this link to go to the NAT Address Mapping Rules screen Apply Click Apply to save your configuration 7 5 Configuring SUA Server Note If you do not assign an IP address in Server Set 1 default server the Prestige discards all packets received for ports that are not specified here or in the remote management setup Click NAT select SUA Only and click Edit Details to open the following screen Refer to Table 16 for port numbers commonly used for particular services Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 80 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 27 Edit SUA NAT Server Set NAT Edit SUA NAT Server Set Start Port No III TH IP Address 0 0 0 0 0 0
254. serted in the protocol filters field under Call Filter Sets in menu 11 5 to block local NetBIOS traffic from triggering calls to the ISP Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 190 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 129 Filtering Remote Node Traffic Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Input Filter Sets protocol filters 3 device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters 2 device filters Call Filter Sets Protocol filters Device filters Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL Note that call filter sets are visible when you select PPPoA or PPPoE encapsulation 191 Chapter 22 Filter Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 23 SNMP Configuration This chapter explains SNMP Configuration menu 22 23 1 About SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is a protocol used for exchanging management information between network devices SNMP is a member of the TCP IP protocol suite Your Prestige supports SNMP agent functionality which allows a manager station to manage and monitor the Prestige through the network The Prestige supports SNMP version one SNMPv1 and version two c SNMPv2c The next figure illustrates an SNMP management operation SNMP is only available if TCP IP is configured Figure 130 SNMP Management Model MANAGER SNMP AGENT AGENT Managed Device Managed Device Managed Device An SNMP managed
255. ses configured here and uses the other WAN backup connection if configured if there is no response Fail Tolerance Type the number of times 2 recommended that your Prestige may ping the IP addresses configured in the Check WAN IP Address field without getting a response before switching to aWAN backup connection or a different WAN backup connection Recovery Interval When the Prestige is using a lower priority connection usually a WAN backup connection it periodically checks to whether or not it can use a higher priority connection Type the number of seconds 30 recommended for the Prestige to wait between checks Allow more time if your destination IP address handles lots of traffic Timeout Type the number of seconds 3 recommended for your Prestige to wait for a ping response from one of the IP addresses in the Check WAN IP Address field before timing out the request The WAN connection is considered down after the Prestige times out the number of times specified in the Fail Tolerance field Use a higher value in this field if your network is busy or congested 71 Chapter 6 WAN Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 13 WAN Backup continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Traffic Redirect Active Select this check box to have the Prestige use traffic redirect if the normal WAN connection goes down Note If you activate traffic redirect you must configure at least o
256. sing the FTP Command from the Command Line 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige 3 Press ENTER when prompted for a username 4 Enter your password as requested the default is 1234 5 Enter bin to set transfer mode to binary 6 Use get to transfer files from the Prestige to the computer for example get rom 0 config rom transfers the configuration file on the Prestige to your computer and renames it config rom See earlier in this chapter for more information on filename conventions 7 Enter quit to exit the ftp prompt 25 2 3 Example of FTP Commands from the Command Line Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance 208 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 143 FTP Session Example Password 230 Logged in ftp gt bin 200 Type I OK ftp gt quit 331 Enter PASS command ftp gt get rom 0 zyxel rom 200 Port command okay 150 Opening data connection for STOR ras 226 File received OK ftp 16384 bytes sent in 1 10Seconds 297 89Kbytes sec 25 2 4 GUl based FTP Clients The following table describes some of the commands that you may see in GUI based FTP clients Table 66 General Commands for GUI based FTP Clients COMMAND DESCRIPTION Host Address Enter the address of the host server Login Type Anonymous This is when a user I D and pass
257. sk FTP is the preferred method for restoring your current computer configuration to your Prestige since FTP is faster Please note that you must wait for the system to automatically restart after the file transfer is complete Note Do not interrupt the file transfer process as this may permanently damage your Prestige 25 3 1 Restore Using FTP For details about backup using T FTP please refer to earlier sections on FTP and TFTP file upload in this chapter 211 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 144 Telnet into Menu 24 6 Menu 24 6 System Maintenance Restore Configuration To transfer the firmware and configuration file to your workstation follow the procedure below 1 Launch the FTP client on your workstation 2 Type open and the IP address of your Prestige Then type root and SMT password as requested 3 Type put backupfilename rom 0 where backupfilename is the name of your backup configuration file on your workstation and rom 0 is the remote file name on the Prestige This restores the configuration to your Prestige 4 The system reboots automatically after a successful file transfer For details on FTP commands please consult the documentation of your FTP client program For details on backup using TFTP note that you must remain in this menu to back up using TFTP please see your Prestige manual
258. ss IGA This field is N A for One to one Many to One and Server mapping types Chapter 7 Network Address Translation NAT Screens 82 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 19 Address Mapping Rules continued LABEL DESCRIPTION Type 1 1 One to one mode maps one local IP address to one global IP address Note that port numbers do not change for the One to one NAT mapping type M 1 Many to One mode maps multiple local IP addresses to one global IP address This is equivalent to SUA i e PAT port address translation ZyXEL s Single User Account feature that previous ZyXEL routers supported only M M Ov Overload Many to Many Overload mode maps multiple local IP addresses to shared global IP addresses MM No No Overload Many to Many No Overload mode maps each local IP address to unique global IP addresses Server This type allows you to specify inside servers of different services behind the NAT to be accessible to the outside world Back Click Back to return to the NAT Mode screen 7 7 Editing an Address Mapping Rule To edit an address mapping rule click the rule s link in the NAT Address Mapping Rules screen to display the screen shown next Figure 29 Address Mapping Rule Edit NAT Edit Address Mapping Rule I Type Local Start IP Local End IP Global Start IP Global End IP One to One 0 0 0 0 N A 0 0 0 0 N A Server Mapping Set N A Edit Details
259. st combination because no extra protocol identifying headers are needed The PPP protocol already contains this information 18 2 2 2 Scenario 2 One VC One Protocol IP Selecting RFC 1483 encapsulation with VC based multiplexing requires the least amount of overhead 0 octets However if there is a potential need for multiple protocol support in the future it may be safer to select PPPoA encapsulation instead of RFC 1483 so you do not need to reconfigure either computer later 18 2 2 3 Scenario 3 Multiple VCs If you have an equal number or more of VCs than the number of protocols then select RFC 1483 encapsulation and VC based multiplexing 143 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 74 Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile enu 11 1 Remote Node Profile Rem Node Name MyISP Active Yes Encapsulation RFC 1483 ultiplexing LLC based Service Name N A Incoming Rem Login N A Rem Password N A Outgoing My Login N A My Password N A Authen N A Press ENTER to Confirm or Route IP Bridge No Edit IP Bridge No Edit ATM Options No Edit Advance Options N A Telco Option Allocated Budget min N A Period hr N A Schedule Sets N A Nailed Up Connection N A Session Options Edit Filter Sets No Idle Timeout sec N A ESC to Cancel In Menu 11 1 Remote Node Profile fill in the fields as described in the following
260. stige can pass the DNS servers to the computers and the computers can query the DNS server directly without the Prestige s intervention 5 3 DNS Server Address Assignment Use DNS Domain Name System to map a domain name to its corresponding IP address and vice versa The DNS server is extremely important because without it you must know the IP address of a computer before you can access it There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses The ISP tells you the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when you sign up If your ISP gives you DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in the LAN Setup screen The Prestige acts as a DNS proxy when the Primary and Secondary DNS Server fields are left blank in the LAN Setup screen 57 Chapter 5 LAN Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 5 4 LAN TCP IP The Prestige has built in DHCP server capability that assigns IP addresses and DNS servers to systems that support DHCP client capability 5 4 1 Factory LAN Defaults The LAN parameters of the Prestige are preset in the factory with the following values IP address of 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask of 255 255 255 0 24 bits DHCP server enabled with 32 client IP addresses starting from 192 168 1 33 These parameters should work for the majority of installations If your ISP gives you explicit DNS server address es read the embedded web configurator help regar
261. stige section in Chapter 2 Introducing the Web Configurator This restores all of the factory defaults including the password Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 244 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 30 8 Problems with the Web Configurator Table 81 Troubleshooting the Web Configurator PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION I cannot access the web configurator Refer to the Quick Start Guide for hardware connections Make sure that there is not an SMT console session running Check that you have enabled web service access If you have configured a secured client IP address your computer s IP address must match it Refer to the chapter on remote management for details For WAN access you must configure remote management to allow server access from the Wan or all Refer to the chapters on remote management for details Your computer s and the Prestige s IP addresses must be on the same subnet for LAN access If you changed the Prestige s LAN IP address then enter the new one as the URL Remove any filters in SMT menu 3 1 LAN or menu 11 5 WAN that block web service See also the Problems with Remote Management section 30 9 Problems with Remote Management Table 82 Troubleshooting Remote Management PROBLEM CORRECTIVE ACTION I cannot remotely manage the Prestige from the LAN or WAN Refer to the Remote Management Limitations section in Chapter 10 Remote Management Configurat
262. t 25 4 2 Configuration File Upload You see the following screen when you telnet into menu 24 7 2 213 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 147 Telnet Into Menu 24 7 2 System Maintenance Menu 24 7 2 System Maintenance Upload System Configuration File To upload the system configuration file follow the procedure below 1 Launch the FTP client on your workstation 2 Type open and the IP address of your system Then type root and SMT password as requested 3 Type put configuration filename rom 0 where configurationfilename is the name of your system configuration file on your workstation which will be transferred to the rom 0 file on the system 4 The system reboots automatically after the upload system configuration file process is complete For details on FTP commands please consult the documentation of your FTP client program For details on uploading system firmware using TFTP note that you must remain on this menu to upload system firmware using TFTP please see your manual Press ENTER to Exit To upload the firmware and the configuration file follow these examples 25 4 3 FTP File Upload Command from the DOS Prompt Example 1 Launch the FTP client on your computer 2 Enter open followed by a space and the IP address of your Prestige 3 Press ENTER when prompted for
263. t Connection with RFC 1483 Connection Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access IP Address 0 0 0 0 Network Address Translation SUA Only Back Next The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 6 Internet Connection with RFC 1483 LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address This field is available if you select Routing in the Mode field Type your ISP assigned IP address in this field Network Address Select None SUA Only or Full Feature from the drop down list box Refer to Translation Chapter 7 on page 74 for more details Back Click Back to go back to the first wizard screen Next Click Next to continue to the next wizard screen Figure 9 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP Connection Setup ISP Parameters for Internet Access IP Address c C Obtain an IP Address Automatically Static IP Address IP Address I Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 ENET ENCAP Gateway 0 0 0 0 Network Address Translation SUA Only Chapter 3 Wizard Setup 48 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The following table describes the labels in this screen Table 7 Internet Connection with ENET ENCAP LABEL DESCRIPTION IP Address A static IP address is a fixed IP that your ISP gives you A dynamic IP address is not fixed the ISP assigns you a different one each time you connect to the Internet Select Obtain an IP Address Automatically if you have a dynamic IP addr
264. t not matching the rule Choices are Check Next Rule Forward or Drop When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel The following figure illustrates the logic flow of an IP filter Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 184 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 122 Executing an IP Filter Packet into IP Filter No Y Apply SrcAddrMask to Src Addr P Check Sre T P Ad r cM Matched Matched Y Apply DestAddrMask to Dest Addr pow 7 Check Dest IP Addr gt Not Matched g gt Matched NN Check Sr Pro tocol Not Matched gt Y Matched A A T Check Sro amp DN Dest Port 7 Not Matched n Matched i f More Yes or Y No Action Not Matched Y Action Matched 4 Check Next Rule Check Next Rule Drop Drop Forward a C P Drop Packet Check Next Rule Accept Packet C J NL A Forward 22 4 2 Generic Filter Rule This section shows you how to configure a generic filter rule The purpose of generic rules is to allow you to filter non IP packets For IP it is generally easier to use the IP rules directly For generic rules the Prestige treats a packet as a byte strea
265. tarting inside global IP address IGA If you have a dynamic IP enter 0 0 0 0 as the Global IP Start Note Note that Global IP Start can be set to 0 0 0 0 only ifthe types are Many to One or Server End This is the ending inside global IP address IGA This field is N A for One to One Many to One and Server types Server Only available when Type is set to Server Type a number from 1 to 10 to choose a Mapping Set server set from menu 15 2 When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 21 4 Configuring a Server behind NAT Follow these steps to configure a server behind NAT 1 Enter 15 in the main menu to go to Menu 15 NAT Setup 2 Enter 2 to display Menu 15 2 NAT Server Sets as shown next Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT 168 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 101 Menu 15 2 NAT Server Setup QOO 005 1001 GS NE Menu 15 2 NAT Server Sets Server Server Server Server Server Server Server Server Server Server Enter Set Set 1 Used for SUA Only Set 2 Set 3 Set 4 Set 5 Set 6 Set 7 Set 8 Set 9 Set 10 Number to Edit 3 Enter 1 to go to Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup as follows Figure 102 Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup Menu 15 2 NAT Server Setup Rule Start Port No End Port
266. ter Type Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select a type of rule Parameters displayed below each type will be different Choices are Generic Filter Rule or TCP IP Filter Rule Active Select Yes to turn on or No to turn off the filter rule Offset Type the starting byte of the data portion in the packet that you want to compare The range for this field is from 0 to 255 Length Type the byte count of the data portion in the packet that you want to compare The range for this field is 0 to 8 Mask Type the mask in Hexadecimal to apply to the data portion before comparison Value Type the value in Hexadecimal to compare with the data portion More If Yes a matching packet is passed to the next filter rule before an action is taken or else the packet is disposed of according to the action fields If More is Yes then Action Matched and Action Not Matched will be N A Log Select the logging option from the following None No packets will be logged Action Matched Only matching packets and rules will be logged Action Not Matched Only packets that do not match the rule parameters will be logged Both All packets will be logged Action Select the action for a matching packet Choices are Check Next Rule Forward or Matched Drop Chapter 22 Filter Configuration 186 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 56 Menu 21 1 5 1 Generic Filter Rule continued FIELD DESCRIPTION Action Not Select
267. that you enter in the DHCP setup are passed to the client machines along with the assigned IP address and subnet mask There are two ways that an ISP disseminates the DNS server addresses The first is for an ISP to tell a customer the DNS server addresses usually in the form of an information sheet when s he signs up If your ISP gives you the DNS server addresses enter them in the DNS Server fields in the LAN Setup screen otherwise leave them blank Some ISP s choose to pass the DNS servers using the DNS server extensions of PPP IPCP IP Control Protocol after the connection is up If your ISP did not give you explicit DNS servers chances are the DNS servers are conveyed through IPCP negotiation The Prestige supports the IPCP DNS server extensions through the DNS proxy feature Ifthe Primary and Secondary DNS Server fields in the LAN Setup screen are not specified for instance left as 0 0 0 0 the Prestige tells the DHCP clients that it itself is the DNS server When a computer sends a DNS query to the Prestige the Prestige forwards the query to the real DNS server learned through IPCP and relays the response back to the computer Please note that DNS proxy works only when the ISP uses the IPCP DNS server extensions It does not mean you can leave the DNS servers out of the DHCP setup under all circumstances If your ISP gives you explicit DNS servers make sure that you enter their IP addresses in the LAN Setup screen This way the Pre
268. this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel 18 3 1 My WAN Addr Sample IP Addresses The following figure uses sample IP addresses to help you understand the field of My WAN Addr in menu 11 3 Refer to the previous Figure 15 in Chapter 5 LAN Setup for a briefreview of what a WAN IP is My WAN Addr indicates the local Prestige WAN IP 172 16 0 1 in the following figure while Rem IP Addr indicates the peer WAN IP 172 16 0 2 in the following figure 147 Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 76 Sample IP Addresses for a TCP IP LAN to LAN Connection Local Network Remote Network 10 0 0 0 192 168 1 0 SS b m m pm SY DSL Lines AR WAN IP 172 16 0 1 WAN IP 172 16 0 2 FSA N S irn JJ Prestige 192 168 1 1 18 4 Remote Node Filter Move the cursor to the Edit Filter Sets field in menu 11 1 then press SPACE BAR to select Yes Press ENTER to display Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter Use Menu 11 5 Remote Node Filter to specify the filter set s to apply to the incoming and outgoing traffic between this remote node and the Prestige and also to prevent certain packets from triggering calls You can specify up to 4 filter sets separated by comma for example 1 5 9 12 in each filter field Note that spaces are
269. tialize the ADSL line 115 Related Documentation 26 Remote DHCP Server 134 remote management 245 Remote Management and NAT 91 Remote Management Limitations 90 225 Remote Management Setup 224 Remote Node 142 197 Remote Node Profile 144 Remote Node Setup 142 Remote node 142 Remote Node Index Number 197 Required fields 120 Reset button the 39 resetting the Prestige 39 Restore Configuration 211 RFC 1483 43 RFC 1631 74 RFC 1483 143 RFC 2364 143 144 RFC2516 32 RIP 134 147 RIPSee Routing Information Protocol 58 romfile 206 Routing 136 Routing Information Protocol 58 Direction 58 Version 58 Routing Policy 228 S Sample IP Addresses 147 Schedule Sets Duration 239 SCRSee Sustain Cell Rate 140 Server 77 164 166 168 169 171 172 221 Server behind NAT 168 Service 4 Service Type 243 Services 78 setup a schedule 239 Single User Account SUA 35 283 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide SMT Menu Overview 119 SMTP 79 SNMP 79 Community 194 Configuration 193 Get 193 GetNext 193 Manager 192 MIBs 193 Set 193 Trap 193 Trusted Host 194 SOHO Small Office Home Office 35 Source Based Routing 228 Splitters 246 Static route 154 Static Routing Topology 154 SUA 77 79 SUA Single User Account 77 162 SUA server 78 80 Default server set 78 SUA vs NAT 77 SUA NAT Server Set 81 Subnet Mask 44 58 134 146 156 199 Subnet Masks 261 Subnetting 261 Supporting Disk 26
270. transmission A router determines the best route for transmission by choosing a path with the lowest cost RIP routing uses hop count as the measurement of cost with a minimum of 1 for directly connected networks The number must be between 1 and 15 a number greater than 15 means the link is down The smaller the number the lower the cost When you have completed this menu press ENTER at the prompt Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel to save your configuration or press ESC at any time to cancel Chapter 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup 130 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 131 Chapter 15 Menu 2 WAN Backup Setup Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 16 Menu 3 LAN Setup This chapter covers how to configure your wired Local Area Network LAN settings 16 1 LAN Setup This section describes how to configure the Ethernet using Menu 3 LAN Setup From the main menu enter 3 to display menu 3 Figure 65 Menu 3 LAN Setup Menu 3 LAN Setup 1 LAN Port Filter Setup 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup Enter Menu Selection Number 16 1 1 General Ethernet Setup This menu allows you to specify filter set s that you wish to apply to the Ethernet traffic You seldom need to filter Ethernet traffic however the filter sets may be useful to block certain packets reduce traffic and prevent security breaches Figure 66 Menu 3 1 LAN Port Filter Se
271. trical traffic flows at the same speed in both directions or asymmetrical the downstream capacity is higher than the upstream capacity Asymmetrical services ADSL are suitable for Internet users because more information is usually downloaded than uploaded For example a simple button click in a web browser can start an extended download that includes graphics and text As data rates increase the carrying distance decreases That means that users who are beyond a certain distance from the telephone company s central office may not be able to obtain the higher speeds A DSL connection is a point to point dedicated circuit meaning that the link is always up and there is no dialing required Introduction to ADSL It is an asymmetrical technology meaning that the downstream data rate is much higher than the upstream data rate As mentioned this works well for a typical Internet session in which more information is downloaded for example from Web servers than is uploaded ADSL operates in a frequency range that is above the frequency range of voice services so the two systems can operate over the same cable Introduction to DSL 28 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 29 Introduction to DSL Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 1 Getting To Know Your Prestige This chapter describes the key features and applications of your Prestige 1 1 Introducing the Prestige Your Prestige integrates high sp
272. ts in menu 11 5 18 2 Remote Node Setup This section describes the protocol independent parameters for a remote node 18 2 1 Remote Node Profile To configure a remote node follow these steps 1 From the main menu enter 11 to display Menu 11 Remote Node Setup 2 When menu 11 appears as shown in the following figure type the number of the remote node that you want to configure Chapter 18 Remote Node Configuration 142 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 73 Menu 11 Remote Node Setup Menu 11 Remote Node Setup ou AWN E Enter Node f to Edit 18 2 2 Encapsulation and Multiplexing Scenarios For Internet access you should use the encapsulation and multiplexing methods used by your ISP Consult your telephone company for information on encapsulation and multiplexing methods for LAN to LAN applications for example between a branch office and corporate headquarters There must be prior agreement on encapsulation and multiplexing methods because they cannot be automatically determined What method s you use also depends on how many VCs you have and how many different network protocols you need The extra overhead that ENET ENCAP encapsulation entails makes it a poor choice in a LAN to LAN application Here are some examples of more suitable combinations in such an application 18 2 2 1 Scenario 1 One VC Multiple Protocols PPPoA RFC 2364 encapsulation with VC based multiplexing is the be
273. tup Menu 3 1 LAN Port Filter Setup Input Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Output Filter Sets protocol filters device filters Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel If you need to define filters please read Chapter 22 Filter Configuration first then return to this menu to define the filter sets Chapter 16 Menu 3 LAN Setup 132 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 16 2 Protocol Dependent Ethernet Setup Depending on the protocols for your applications you need to configure the respective Ethernet Setup as outlined below For TCP IP Ethernet setup refer to the Internet Access Configuration section For bridging Ethernet setup refer to Chapter 20 Bridging Setup 16 3 CP IP Ethernet Setup and DHCP Use menu 3 2 to configure your Prestige for TCP IP To edit menu 3 2 enter 3 from the main menu to display Menu 3 LAN Setup When menu 3 appears press 2 and press ENTER to display Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup as shown next Figure 67 Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Ethernet Setup Menu 3 2 TCP IP and DHCP Setup DHCP Setup DHCP Server Client IP Pool Starting Address 192 168 1 33 Size of Client IP Pool 32 Primary DNS Server 0 0 0 0 Secondary DNS Server 0 0 0 Remote DHCP Server N A TCP IP Setup IP Address 192 168 1 1 IP Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 RIP Direction Both Version RIP 2B ulticast None IP Policies Edit IP A
274. turn the Prestige to its factory defaults Refer to the Resetting the Prestige section D gt Note Do not turn off the Prestige while firmware upload is in progress Chapter 12 Maintenance 116 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide After you see the Firmware Upload in Process screen wait two minutes before logging into the Prestige again The Prestige automatically restarts in this time causing a temporary network disconnect In some operating systems you may see the following icon on your desktop Figure 56 Network Temporarily Disconnected D Local Area Connection Network cable unplugged After two minutes log in again and check your new firmware version in the System Status screen Ifthe upload was not successful the following screen will appear Click Back to go back to the Firmware screen Figure 57 Error Message Error Message ERROR FAILTO UPDATE DUE TO The uploaded file was not accepted by the router Back 117 Chapter 12 Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide CHAPTER 13 Introducing the SMT This chapter explains how to access and navigate the System Management Terminal and gives an overview of its menus 13 1 SMT Introduction The Prestige s SMT System Management Terminal is a menu driven interface that you can access from a terminal emulator over a telnet connection This chapter shows you how to access the SMT System Management Term
275. uide Figure 123 Menu 21 5 1 Generic Filter Rule sense ea 186 Figure 124 Protocol and Device Filter Sets siccicccssescsesensaecciveassencaceusssasadvsensnnsedouns sekd eik stan 187 Figure 125 Sample Telnet Filter aaa se 188 Figure 126 Menu 21 6 1 Sample Filet ai tense a 189 Figure 127 Menu 21 6 1 Sample Filter Rules Summary s ecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneneeees 189 Figure 128 Filtering Elheimel Trie rss na 190 Figure 129 Filtering Remote Node Traffic ace esee sien tra aeta tha atta prn ania kannek LENE 191 Figure 130 SNMP Management Model nn 192 Figure 131 Menu zz SNMP Configuration ee 193 Figure 132 Menu 24 System Maintenance nun unannsnrenensnsnenesenenseereensnnnenrnenennennen 196 Figure 133 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status uusu00usssnnnnannannsnnnannnnasnnnnnnnnnenn 197 Figure 134 Menu 24 2 System Information and Console Port Speed nne 198 Figure 135 Menu 24 2 1 System Maintenance Information nanne ennen ennen 199 Figure 136 Menu 24 2 2 System Maintenance Change Console Port Speed 200 Figure 137 Menu 24 3 System Maintenance Log and Trace see 200 Figure 138 Sample Error and Information Messages eese 201 Figure 139 Menu 24 3 2 System Maintenance Syslog and Accounting 201 Figure 140 Syslog Bramble nee ae 202 Figure 141 Menu 24 4 System Maintenance Diagnostic anneer 204 Figure 142 Telnet in Monu 243
276. ves you information on your DSL telephone line status number of packets sent and received To get to System Status type 24 to go to Menu 24 System Maintenance From this menu type 1 System Status There are two commands in Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status Entering 1 resets the counters ESC takes you back to the previous screen Chapter 24 System Information and Diagnosis 196 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide The following table describes the fields present in Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status which are read only and meant for diagnostic purposes Figure 133 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status 03205259 Sat Jan O1 2000 Node Lnk Status TxPkts RxPkts Errors Tx B s Rx B s Up Time 1 PPPoE Idle 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 2 N A 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 3 N A 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 4 N A 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 5 N A 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 6 N A 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 7 N A 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 8 N A 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 My WAN IP from ISP 0 0 0 0 Ethernet WAN Status 100M Full Duplex Tx Pkts 23216 Line Status Down Collisions 0 Rx Pkts 23740 Upstream Speed 0 kbps CPU Load 1 65 Downstream Speed 0 kbps Press Command COMMANDS 1 Reset Counters ESC Exit The following table describes the fields present in Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status Table 61 Menu 24 1 System Maintenance Status FI
277. vices using PPP The Prestige bridges a PPP session over Ethernet PPP over Ethernet RFC 2516 from your computer to an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit which connects to ADSL Access Concentrator where the PPP session terminates One PVC can support any number of PPP sessions from your LAN For more information on PPPoE see the appendices 3 1 1 3 PPPoA PPPoA stands for Point to Point Protocol over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AAL5 A PPPoA connection functions like a dial up Internet connection The Prestige encapsulates the PPP session based on RFC1483 and sends it through an ATM PVC Permanent Virtual Circuit to the Internet Service Provider s ISP DSLAM digital access multiplexer Please refer to RFC 2364 for more information on PPPoA Refer to RFC 1661 for more information on PPP Chapter 3 Wizard Setup 42 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 3 1 1 4 RFC 1483 RFC 1483 describes two methods for Multiprotocol Encapsulation over ATM Adaptation Layer 5 AALS The first method allows multiplexing of multiple protocols over a single ATM virtual circuit LLC based multiplexing and the second method assumes that each protocol is carried over a separate ATM virtual circuit VC based multiplexing Please refer to the RFC for more detailed information 3 1 2 Multiplexing There are two conventions to identify what protocols the virtual circuit VC is carrying Be sure to use the multiplexing method required by your ISP 3 1 2
278. want to configure 3 Move the cursor to the Edit IP Bridge field press SPACE BAR to select Yes and then press ENTER to bring up Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options Figure 95 Applying NAT in Menus 4 amp 11 3 Menu 11 3 Remote Node Network Layer Options IP Options Bridge Options Rem IP Addr 0 0 0 0 Rem Subnet Mask 0 0 0 0 y WAN Addr 0 0 0 0 NAT SUA Only Address Mapping Set N A etric 2 Private No RIP Direction Both Version RIP 2B ulticast None IP Policies Enter here to CONFIRM or ESC to CANCEL IP Address Assignment Static Ethernet Addr Timeout min N A The following table describes the options for Network Address Translation 163 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Table 49 Applying NAT in Menus 4 amp 11 3 FIELD DESCRIPTION NAT Press SPACE BAR and then ENTER to select Full Feature if you have multiple public WAN IP addresses for your Prestige The SMT uses the address mapping set that you configure and enter in the Address Mapping Set field see the Address Mapping Sets section Select None to disable NAT When you select SUA Only the SMT uses Address Mapping Set 255 see the Address Mapping Sets section Choose SUA Only if you have just one public WAN IP address for your Prestige 21 3 NAT Setup Use the address mapping sets menus and submenus t
279. word is automatically supplied to the server for anonymous access Anonymous logins will work only if your ISP or service administrator has enabled this option Normal The server requires a unique User ID and Password to login Transfer Type Transfer files in either ASCII plain text format or in binary mode Initial Remote Directory Specify the default remote directory path Initial Local Directory Specify the default local directory path 25 2 5 TFTP and FTP over WAN Management Limitations TFTP FTP and Telnet over WAN will not work when You have disabled Telnet service in menu 24 11 You have applied a filter in menu 3 1 LAN or in menu 11 5 WAN to block Telnet service The IP address in the Secured Client IP field in menu 24 11 does not match the client IP If it does not match the Prestige will disconnect the Telnet session immediately You have an SMT console session running 209 Chapter 25 Firmware and Configuration File Maintenance Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide 25 2 6 Backup Configuration Using TFTP The Prestige supports the up downloading of the firmware and the configuration file using TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol over LAN Although TFTP should work over WAN as well it is not recommended To use TFTP your computer must have both telnet and TFTP clients To backup the configuration file follow the procedure shown next 1 Use telnet from your computer to connect to the
280. ws Setup Communication Components 97 16 Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 37 Network Connection au 97 Figure 38 Windows Optional Networking Components Wizard eee 98 Figure 39 Networking SENICES m 99 Figure 40 Network Connections ke aka 100 Figure 41 Internet Connection Properties ssssrssisssisssissiniisssrrrninisrsririr ridens br ARR DON QA 101 Figure 42 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings nnee 102 Figure 43 Internet Connection Properties Advanced Settings Add 102 go rrsica Nr de c 103 Figure 45 Internet Connection Status ee 103 Figure 46 Network Connections ana reinen 104 Figure 47 Network Connections My Network Places esee 105 Figure 48 Network Connections My Network Places Properties Example 106 Eos mokccs SE ae x 109 Figure 50 System Status Show Statisties inecceiessiace tbi soca scans educa cach d diete bbb ENDE attt ed 110 FRE TDAP TBI ner ee ee 112 aU Etsi A PIO es 112 Figure 53 Diagnostic Genaral ee 114 Figure 54 Diagnostie DSL LING dorso rA eds Epp HU eas abu dls ERAT ee aan ka 115 Figure 55 Firmware Upgrade Mn 116 Figure 56 Network Temporarily Disconnected nnn aensensereenenenserenensen seren ennennenenenn 117 Flere 937 Enor Massage WE E EU m Rea Kortere 117 Figure SS LOGIT BOON ss 119 Figure 59 Prestige SMT Menu Overview 22222
281. y set and also go to menu 15 2 to specify the inside server behind the NAT as shown in the next figure 171 Chapter 21 Network Address Translation NAT Prestige 660RU Tx Series User s Guide Figure 107 Menu 15 2 1 Specifying an Inside Server Menu 15 2 1 NAT Server Setup Used for SUA Only Rule Start Port No End Port No IP Address 1 Default Default 192 168 1 10 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ou 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 00 00 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 T5154 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 Press ENTER to Confirm or ESC to Cancel 21 5 3 Example 3 Multiple Public IP Addresses With Inside Servers In this example there are 3 IGAs from our ISP There are many departments but two have their own FTP server All departments share the same router The example will reserve one IGA for each department with an FTP server and all departments use the other IGA Map the FTP servers to the first two IGAs and the other LAN traffic to the remaining IGA Map the third IGA to an inside web server and mail server Four rules need to be configured two bi directional and two unidirectional as follows 1 Map the first IGA to the first inside FTP server for FTP traffic in both directions 1 1 mapping giving both local and global IP addresses 2 Map the second IGA to our second inside FTP server for FTP traffic in both directions 1 1 mapping giving b

ZyXEL ADSL2+ User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents